all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals | photos |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Host user manual 1 of 2 | Users Manual | 1.62 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Host user manual 2 of 2 | Users Manual | 1.02 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Installation Guide | Users Manual | 181.18 KiB | / September 05 2010 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
OEM Installation guide | Users Manual | 279.08 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
User Manual I70C | Users Manual | 3.59 MiB | / September 12 2009 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
User Manual Q44C | Users Manual | 5.00 MiB | / September 12 2009 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
User Manual legal part | Users Manual | 1.86 MiB | / September 12 2009 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
User manual 1 of 2 | Users Manual | 81.97 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
User manual 2 of 2 | Users Manual | 3.23 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Users Manual | Users Manual | 1.24 MiB | June 04 2009 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Internal Photos | Internal Photos | 196.83 KiB | June 04 2009 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
External Photos | External Photos | 377.52 KiB | June 04 2009 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
External Photos I70C | External Photos | 123.05 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
External Photos Q44C | External Photos | 132.54 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Host label format | ID Label/Location Info | 10.23 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Label | ID Label/Location Info | 27.97 KiB | June 04 2009 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Label ID | ID Label/Location Info | 286.58 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Agent authorization 1 of 2 | Cover Letter(s) | 115.51 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Agent authorization 2 of 2 | Cover Letter(s) | 95.92 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Request for C2PC Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 38.32 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Request for confidentiality | Cover Letter(s) | 38.95 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
C2PC Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 31.92 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Confidentiality Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 71.05 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Test Setup Photos | / September 05 2010 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Agent authorization | Cover Letter(s) | 95.93 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Antenna specification | Parts List/Tune Up Info | 545.65 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Authorization letter | Cover Letter(s) | 115.51 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Class II permissive change letter | Cover Letter(s) | 20.69 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
TCB Q and A | Cover Letter(s) | 83.40 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Antenna Information | Cover Letter(s) | 11.00 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Confidentiality Request | Cover Letter(s) | 36.29 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Request for PC2 | Cover Letter(s) | 24.15 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Test Setup Photos | / September 12 2009 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Test Setup Photos | / September 12 2009 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
|
Modular Approval Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 94.48 KiB | June 04 2009 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Test Report | June 04 2009 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Test Setup Photos | June 04 2009 |
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Host user manual 1 of 2 | Users Manual | 1.62 MiB |
For more information about HP products and services, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com. Copyright 2010 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: April 2010 Document Part Number: 602795-001 Contents 1 Getting started Charging the battery . 1 Verifying the box contents . 2 Getting information. 3 User Manual on a Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card . 3 Electronic manuals in Help and Support . 3 Turning off the computer from Windows . 4 2 Whats new?
Windows 7 . 5 Customizable desktop . 5 HP QuickWeb software (select models only). 5 Action keys . 6 One-touch launch keys . 8 TouchPad . 9 Navigating. 9 Selecting . 9 Turning the TouchPad on and off . 10 Using TouchPad gestures . 10 Beats Audio. 12 Sharing optical drives . 13 3 Using HP QuickWeb (select models only) Setting up HP QuickWeb for the first time. 16 Starting Microsoft Windows. 17 Identifying the QuickWeb control buttons . 17 Identifying the LaunchBar icons. 18 Identifying the notification icons . 19 Using the Settings panel . 20 Configuring the network. 20 Playing music . 20 Browsing photos . 21 Creating instant messages with Chat . 21 Making Internet phone calls with Skype (select models only). 21 Disabling and enabling HP QuickWeb. 22 4 Connecting to the Internet Choosing the type of Internet access . 23 Using an ISP . 23 Connecting to a wired network. 24 Connecting to an existing wireless network . 25 Setting up a new wireless network . 26 Step 1: Purchase and install a wireless router. 27 Step 2: Configure the computer to connect to the wireless network . 27 User Manual iii Contents 5 Multimedia features Using multimedia software. 29 Installing multimedia software from a disc . 29 Using HP MediaSmart . 30 Using the webcam. 30 Using audio features . 31 Using video features . 31 Connecting an external monitor or projector . 31 Connecting an HDMI device . 31 6 Updating software Updating the software installed on the computer . 33 Updating programs and drivers. 33 7 Backup and recovery A Creating recovery discs. 35 Backing up your information . 36 Using Windows Backup and Restore . 37 Using system restore points . 37 When to create restore points . 37 Creating a system restore point. 38 Restoring to a previous date and time. 38 Performing a recovery . 38 Recovering using the recovery discs . 39 Recovering using the partition on the hard drive (select models only) . 39 Product information and troubleshooting Input power . 41 Operating environment . 41 Traveling with the computer. 42 Routine care . 43 Cleaning the display . 43 Cleaning the TouchPad and keyboard . 43 Troubleshooting resources . 43 Quick troubleshooting. 44 The computer is unable to start up . 44 The TouchPad is behaving erratically . 44 The computer screen is blank . 44 Software is functioning abnormally . 44 The computer is on but is not responding. 45 The computer is unusually warm . 45 An external device is not working . 45 The wireless network connection is not working . 46 Index iv User Manual 1 Getting started Charging the battery To fully charge the battery, leave the computer plugged into external power until the battery light on the left side of the computer turns white. WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment, observe these guidelines:
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. A partially charged new battery can run the computer after software setup is complete, but battery charge displays will not be accurate until the new battery has been fully charged. When the computer is connected to external power, the battery light turns white when the battery is fully charged. User Manual 1 1 Getting started Verifying the box contents Computer color, features, and options may vary by computer model. The illustrations in this guide may look slightly different from your computer. Component 1 Computer 2 AC adapter Component 3 Power cord*
4 SD Memory Card
*Power cords vary in appearance by country or region. 2 User Manual 1 Getting started Getting information User Manual on a Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card This guide provides information about new features, such as HP QuickWeb software, action keys, TouchPad gestures, optical drive sharing, as well as details about connecting to the Internet and multimedia features. Electronic manuals in Help and Support For detailed information about your computer, such as information about power management, multimedia, TouchPad and keyboard, security, and other features, click Start, click Help and Support, and then click User Guides. You do not need to connect to the Internet to access the user guides in Help and Support. User Manual 3 1 Getting started Help and Support In Help and Support, you can find information about technical support, and about the operating system, drivers, and troubleshooting tools. To access Help and Support, click Start, and then click Help and Support. For country- or region-specific support, go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety & Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. To access this document, click Start, click Help and Support, and then click User Guides. The Safety & Comfort Guide is also available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo. Regulatory, safety, and environmental notices For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access the notices, click Start, click Help and Support, and then click User Guides. Turning off the computer from Windows To turn off the computer from Windows:
1. Save your work and close all programs. 2. Click Start, and then click Shut down. 4 User Manual 2 Whats new?
Windows 7 Your computer includes the new Windows 7 operating system. Windows 7 has several new program and feature enhancements, such as:
Faster startup Updated Wi-Fi network controls Customizable taskbar Fewer pop-ups and notifications Support for more multimedia formats Customizable desktop The Stardock MyColors program (select models only) offers a customizable desktop theme that transforms the look and feel of your basic Windows desktop. The new desktop includes custom icons, visual styles (Start button and taskbar), and a corresponding wallpaper. To change back to the standard Windows theme, open the Stardock MyColors program and select the standard Windows theme. HP QuickWeb software (select models only) HP QuickWeb software is an optional, instant-on environment that is separate from your Windows operating system. QuickWeb allows you to rapidly access certain programs without the need to start your operating system. You will enjoy this feature if you browse the Internet, view and send e-mail, view digital photos, listen to music, or keep in touch through instant messages or Skype. QuickWeb is ready to go within seconds of pressing the power button. For detailed information on using QuickWeb, refer to Chapter 3, Using HP QuickWeb
(select models only). User Manual 5 2 Whats new?
Action keys Action keys are customized actions that are assigned to specific keys at the top of the keyboard. To use an action key, press and hold the key to activate the assigned action. Some action keys are not available in QuickWeb. For additional information about action keys, refer to the HP ENVY 15 User Guide. To access this guide, click Start, click Help and Support, and then click User Guides. Icon Description Opens Help and Support, which provides information about your Windows operating system and computer, answers to questions, tutorials, and updates to your computer. Help and Support also provides automated troubleshooting and links to support specialists. Decreases the screen brightness level incrementally when held down. Increases the screen brightness level incrementally when held down. Switches the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, pressing this key alternates the screen image from computer display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Most external monitors receive video information from the computer using the external VGA video standard. The switch screen image key can also alternate images among other devices that are receiving video information from the computer.
(Continued) User Manual 6 2 Whats new?
Icon Description Plays the previous track of an audio CD, or the previous section of a DVD or a Blu-ray Disc (BD). Plays, pauses, or resumes an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Stops audio or video playback of a CD, a DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Decreases speaker sound incrementally when held down. Increases speaker sound incrementally when held down. Mutes or restores speaker sound. Initiates the QuickLock security feature. QuickLock protects your information by displaying the operating system Log On window. While the Log On window is displayed, the computer cannot be accessed until a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password is entered. Before you can use QuickLock, you must set a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password. For instructions, refer to Help and Support. prt sc Takes a snapshot or picture of your computer screen and copies it to the clipboard. User Manual 7 2 Whats new?
One-touch launch keys One-touch launch keys are customized actions that are assigned to specific keys on the left side of the keyboard. To use a one-touch launch key, press the key to activate the assigned action. Item Icon Description 1 2 3 4 5 Opens your default e-mail program. The first time you press the mail key, you may be prompted to set up your e-mail account. After you have set up your e-mail account, you can press the mail key to quickly access your e-mail. Opens HP MediaSmart. HP MediaSmart turns your computer into a mobile entertainment center. You can enjoy music and movies, and manage and edit your photo collections. Opens a Web browser. Until you have set up your Internet or network services, the Web key opens the Windows Internet Connection Wizard. After you have set up your Internet or network services and your Web browser home page, you can press the Web key to quickly access your home page and the Internet. Opens the Print Options window of the active Windows program. Opens the Windows calculator function. 8 User Manual 2 Whats new?
TouchPad Navigating To move the pointer, slide one finger across the TouchPad in the direction you want the pointer to go. Selecting Use the left and right TouchPad buttons like the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. User Manual 9 2 Whats new?
Turning the TouchPad on and off To turn the TouchPad on and off, quickly double-tap the TouchPad off indicator. When the TouchPad is on, the light is off. Using TouchPad gestures The TouchPad supports gestures that make it easy and fun to work with images or pages of text. To activate the TouchPad gestures, place 2 fingers on the TouchPad at the same time as described in the following sections. Scrolling Scrolling is useful for moving up or down on a page or image. To scroll, place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad and drag them across the TouchPad in an up, down, left, or right motion. Scrolling speed is controlled by finger speed. 10 User Manual 2 Whats new?
Pinching/Zooming Pinching allows you to zoom in or out on items such as PDFs, images, and photos. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad, and then moving them apart. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad, and then moving them together. Setting preferences Scrolling and pinching are enabled at the factory. You computer also supports additional TouchPad gestures that are disabled at the factory. To disable or reenable TouchPad gestures or to explore other TouchPad gestures:
1. Double-click the Synaptics icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click the Device Settings tab. 2. Select the device, and then click Settings. 3. Select the check box to disable or reenable the TouchPad gesture. 4. Click Apply, and then click OK. For additional information about using the TouchPad, refer to the HP ENVY 15 User Guide. To access this guide, click Start, click Help and Support, and then click User Guides. User Manual 11 2 Whats new?
Beats Audio To increase or decrease the Beats Audio bass settings, press fn+b. Beats Audio is an enhanced audio profile that provides a deep, controlled bass while maintaining a clear sound. Beats Audio is enabled by default. You can also view and control the bass settings through the Windows operating system. Click Start, click Control Panel, click Sound, and then click Speakers and Headphone Properties to view and control the bass properties. The following table shows and describes the Beats Audio icons. Icon Description Indicates that Beats Audio is connected. Indicates that Beats Audio is not connected. 12 User Manual 2 Whats new?
Sharing optical drives Although your computer does not have an integrated optical drive, you can easily access software, install programs, and access information by sharing an optical drive connected to another computer in your network. Drive sharing is a feature of the Windows operating system that allows a drive on one computer to be accessible to other computers on the same network. You must have a network set up in order to share an optical drive. Refer to Help and Support for information on setting up a network. Some discs, such as DVD movies and game discs, may be copy-protected and therefore unusable through DVD or CD sharing. To share an optical drive:
1. From the computer with the optical drive you want to share, click Start, and then click Computer. 2. Right-click the optical drive you want to share, and then click Properties. 3. Click the Sharing tab, and then click Advanced Sharing. 4. Select the Share this folder check box. 5. Type a name for the optical drive in Share name text box. 6. Click Apply, and then click OK. 7. To view the shared optical drive on your computer, click Start, click Control Panel, click Network and Internet, and then click Network and Sharing Center. User Manual 13 3 Using HP QuickWeb (select models only) HP QuickWeb is an optional, instant-on environment that is separate from your Windows operating system. QuickWeb allows you to rapidly access a Web browser, and other communication and multimedia programs, without the need to start Windows. QuickWeb is ready to go within seconds of pressing the power button after system setup. QuickWeb includes the following features:
Web browserSearch and browse the Internet, and create links to your favorite Web sites. ChatChat with friends on multiple instant messaging programs, such as Google Talk, Windows Live Messenger, Yahoo! Messenger, and other providers. Skype (select models only)Skype is a voice over Internet protocol (VoIP) that lets you communicate free of charge with other Skype users. With Skype, you can have a conference call or a video chat with one or more people at a time. You can also make long-distance phone calls to land lines. Web e-mailView and send e-mail using Yahoo, Gmail, and other Web e-mail providers. Web calendarDisplay, edit, and organize your schedule using your favorite online calendar program. Music PlayerListen to your favorite music and create playlists. Photo ViewerBrowse through photos, create albums, and view slide shows. User Manual 15 3 Using HP QuickWeb (select models only) Setting up HP QuickWeb for the first time The first time you turn on your computer after completing the Windows setup process, the QuickWeb setup screens appear. Follow the on-screen instructions to activate QuickWeb. At the end of the setup process, you are given the choice to start Windows or to continue to QuickWeb for the current session. If you select the option to start QuickWeb, the QuickWeb Home screen appears. Click an icon on the QuickWeb Home screen to launch a program. The QuickWeb Home screen may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. The following section assumes that you have completed the QuickWeb setup process and enabled QuickWeb. For more information, refer to the QuickWeb software Help. QuickWeb allows you to access a Web browser, and other communication and multimedia programs, within seconds without starting Windows. To start QuickWeb when the computer is powered off:
1. Turn on your computer. The HP QuickWeb Home screen appears. 2. Click an icon on the QuickWeb Home screen to launch a program. 16 User Manual 3 Using HP QuickWeb (select models only) Starting Microsoft Windows If QuickWeb has been activated, it will start every time you power up your computer. To start Microsoft Windows, you must click the Windows Start icon in the QuickWeb Home screen. To start Microsoft Windows:
1. Turn on your computer. The HP QuickWeb Home screen appears. 2. Click the Windows Start icon on the far left of the QuickWeb Home screen. 3. A dialog box appears, asking if you are sure you want to start Windows. Click Yes. Clicking on the Make Windows your default Power On experience in this dialog box disables QuickWeb. To reenable QuickWeb, refer to the section Disabling and enabling HP QuickWeb, later in this chapter. Identifying the QuickWeb control buttons The following table shows and describes the QuickWeb control buttons. Icon Description Launches the Windows operating system. Turns off the computer from QuickWeb. For details on turning off the computer from Windows, refer to Turning off the computer from Windows in Chapter 1. User Manual 17 3 Using HP QuickWeb (select models only) Identifying the LaunchBar icons The following table shows and describes HP QuickWeb icons. Icon Description Launches the Web browser. You can bookmark your favorite Web sites and view Web pages. Launches the Chat application. This is compatible with Google Talk, Windows Live Messenger, Yahoo! Messenger, and other providers. Launches Skype (select models only). This is a voice over Internet protocol
(VoIP) that lets you communicate free of charge with other Skype users. Launches Web e-mail so you can view your Web-based e-mail programs, such as Gmail, Hotmail, Yahoo, and other Web e-mail providers. Launches Web calendar so you can schedule and manage your activities using your favorite online calendar application. Launches Music Player. Select and play music stored on your hard drive or external drives. Supports .mp3 files. Launches Photo Viewer. Browse photos stored on your hard drive or external drive. Supports .bmp, .gif, .jpg, and .png file types. 18 User Manual 3 Using HP QuickWeb (select models only) Identifying the notification icons The following table shows and describes the notification icons:
Icon Description Indicates that a USB drive is present. If a USB drive is inserted, the File Manager window containing a USB icon appears. Click the USB icon to open the File Manager window. Right-click the USB icon to open a menu to safely eject the device. If your HP ENVY 15 comes equipped with USB 3.0, please note that only the eSATA/USB 2.0 port may be used for USB devices while in HP QuickWeb mode. Indicates that the network is connected. Click the Network icon to open the Network dialog box. Indicates that the network is disconnected. Controls volume for speakers and the microphone. Click the Volume Control icon to open the Volume Control dialog box. Controls power settings:
When the computer is connected to AC power, the icon appears with an AC power cord. When the computer is running on battery power, the icon appears as only a battery. The state of charge is indicated by the color of the Battery icon:
Green: charged Yellow: low Red: critical low Click the Battery icon to display a menu to control power settings and to see information about battery capacity. Launches the Settings panel. Use the Settings panel to modify QuickWeb settings such as date and time. Refer to the following section, Using the Settings panel for more information. Displays the QuickWeb software Help. User Manual 19 3 Using HP QuickWeb (select models only) Using the Settings panel 1. After turning on the computer, click the Settings icon. The Settings panel selection box is displayed. 2. Click the icon that corresponds to the system setting you want to modify. Choose from any of the following:
Date and Time Input Language Language and Keyboard Network Environment Settings Screen Settings Volume Control Applications For more information on changing settings in the Settings panel, refer to the HP QuickWeb software Help. Configuring the network QuickWeb can be configured to set up a wireless connection by using the HP QuickWeb Configuration Tool. To access this tool, click the Settings icon, click Network, and then select the Enable Wi-Fi check box. For more information on setting up a wireless connection using HP QuickWeb and Windows, refer to Chapter 4, Connecting to the Internet, and to the HP QuickWeb software Help. Playing music To play music:
1. Click the Music icon on the LaunchBar. Music Player is displayed. 2. On the left side of the Music Player window, navigate to the directory that contains your music files. The directory can be on either your hard drive or an external drive. 3. Click a music file you want to play from the list on the right side of the window. 4. When you are finished making your music selection, click the Play icon at the bottom right of the window. 20 User Manual 3 Using HP QuickWeb (select models only) Browsing photos To view photos:
1. Click the Photos icon on the LaunchBar. Photo Viewer is displayed. 2. On the left side of the Photo Viewer window, navigate to the directory that contains your photos. The directory can be on either your hard drive or an external drive. The right side of the Photo Viewer window displays thumbnail views of all the photos in the selected directory. 3. Double-click the thumbnail of the photo you want to view. The photo thumbnail views appear at the bottom right of the Photo Viewer window. A larger view of the selected photo appears above the thumbnails. 4. Navigate the thumbnail views by pressing the right arrow key or left arrow key, or by clicking the next thumbnail image you want to see enlarged. Creating instant messages with Chat Chat is an instant messaging program that is compatible with Google Talk, Yahoo!
Messenger, and other providers. To start an instant messaging session:
1. Click the Chat icon on the LaunchBar. The buddy list window and a configuration tool are displayed. 2. In the buddy list window, click Help to get information on configuring Chat for your instant messaging protocol and setting up your account. You can also configure Chat to work with an existing instant messaging account. Making Internet phone calls with Skype (select models only) Skype is a voice over Internet protocol (VoIP) that lets you communicate free of charge with other Skype users. You can also make long-distance phone calls to land lines at lower costs than many long-distance carriers charge. To start Skype:
1. Click the Skype icon on the LaunchBar. A Sign in to Skype window is displayed. 2. Click the Create a new Skype Account tab. 3. Before you proceed, read the information provided by the links at the bottom of the Create Account window, to be sure that you understand the terms and possible charges you can incur from using Skype. For more information on using Skype, refer to the software Help. User Manual 21 3 Using HP QuickWeb (select models only) Disabling and enabling HP QuickWeb You can disable or reenable QuickWeb in two ways. To disable or reenable QuickWeb from within the Windows operating system:
1. Click Start, click All Programs, and then click HP QuickWeb. The HP QuickWeb Installer folder displays. Click HP QuickWeb Configuration Tool. 2. Select the Enable QuickWeb check box. 3. Click OK. The HP QuickWeb Configuration Tool can also be accessed by clicking Start, clicking Control Panel, and then clicking the View by arrow. Select Large icons or Small icons to locate the HP QuickWeb Configuration Tool. To disable or reenable QuickWeb from within Setup Utility:
1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer. Immediately press f10 repeatedly to start Setup Utility. 2. Use the right arrow key to tab across the menu headings and select System Configuration. 3. Use the down arrow key to select Boot Options, and then press enter. The Boot Options screen opens. 4. Use the down arrow key to select HP QuickWeb, and then press enter. 5. Use the arrow keys to select Disable or Enable, and then press enter. 6. To save your change and exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit, select Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. 22 User Manual 4 Connecting to the Internet Internet hardware and software features vary depending on the computer model and your location. Choosing the type of Internet access The computer supports 2 types of Internet access:
WiredYou can access the Internet by connecting to a broadband network using the RJ-45 (network) jack. To learn how to connect to a wired network, refer to the Connecting to a wired network section. WirelessFor mobile Internet access, you can use a wireless connection. To learn about adding the computer to an existing network or setting up a wireless network, refer to the Connecting to an existing wireless network section or the Setting up a new wireless network section. The networking features of the computer enable you to access high-speed broadband Internet service providers with the following types of connections:
Cable modem Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Satellite Other services Broadband access may require additional hardware or software provided by your Internet service provider (ISP). Using an ISP The following features will help you set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account:
Choosing an ISP: You must set up Internet service before you can connect to the Internet. Contact a local ISP to purchase Internet service and a modem. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless computer to the modem, and test the Internet service. Your ISP will give you a user ID and password to access the Internet. Record this information and store it in a safe place. Internet Services & Offers (available in some locations): This utility assists with signing up for a new Internet account and configuring the computer to use an existing account. To access this utility, click Start, click All Programs, click Online Services, and then click Get Online. User Manual 23 4 Connecting to the Internet ISP-provided icons (available in some locations): These icons may be displayed either individually on the Windows desktop or grouped in a desktop folder named Online Services. To set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account, double-click an icon, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Windows Connect to the Internet Wizard: You can use the Windows Connect to the Internet Wizard to connect to the Internet in any of these situations:
You already have an account with an ISP. You have a disc from an ISP. You do not have an Internet account and want to select an ISP from the list provided within the wizard. (The list of ISP providers is not available in all regions.) You have selected an unlisted ISP, and the ISP has provided you with information such as a specific IP address and POP3 and SMTP settings. To access the Windows Connect to the Internet Wizard and instructions for using it, click Start, click Help and Support, and then type Connect to the Internet wizard in the Search box. Connecting to a wired network Connecting to a wired network requires a network cable (purchased separately). If the cable contains noise suppression circuitry 1, which prevents interference from TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable 2 toward the computer. 24 User Manual 4 Connecting to the Internet To connect the cable:
WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. 1. Connect the network cable to the RJ-45 (network) jack 1 on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the network cable to a network wall jack 2. Connecting to an existing wireless network To connect the computer to an existing wireless network, follow these steps:
1. Click the network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 2. Select the network to which you want to connect. 3. Click Connect. 4. If required, enter the security key. User Manual 25 4 Connecting to the Internet Setting up a new wireless network This section describes how to use a wireless computer to set up a typical home or small office wireless network, which is also called a wireless local area network (WLAN). To set up a wireless network and to connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:
A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider (ISP) A wireless router (purchased separately) Your new wireless computer The following illustration shows an example of a completed wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet and to a wired computer. As this network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. 26 User Manual Step 1: Purchase and install a wireless router 4 Connecting to the Internet Read this section carefully before you install the wireless router using the router manufacturer's instructions and your wireless computer. If you need technical assistance during the router installation, contact the router manufacturer. Temporarily connect your new wireless computer to the router by using the network cable provided with the router. This will ensure that the computer can access the Internet. 1. Be sure that the wireless device is off (the wireless light on the computer is amber). If the wireless device is on, press the wireless key to turn it off. For help locating the wireless key or light, refer to the HP ENVY 15 User Guide in Help and Support. 2. During the router installation, the router manufacturer's software allows you to change the network name (SSID) and enable security to protect the privacy of your wireless network. Many routers are shipped with a default network name and with security disabled. If you change the default network name or enable security during the router setup, record the information and store it in a safe place. You will need this information when you configure the computer and any other existing computers to access the router. If you do not enable security, an unauthorized wireless user can access the information on the computer and use your Internet connection without your knowledge. For more information on securing your wireless network, refer to the HP ENVY 15 User Guide in Help and Support. The Windows operating system also provides tools to help you set up your wireless network for the first time. To use the Windows tools to set up your network, click Start, click Control Panel, click Network and Internet, click Set up a new connection or network, and then click Set up a new network. Follow the on-screen instructions. Step 2: Configure the computer to connect to the wireless network 1. If the computer is off, turn it on. 2. Be sure that the wireless device is on (the wireless light is off). For help locating the wireless key or light, refer to the HP ENVY 15 User Guide in Help and Support. 3. Connect the computer to the wireless network:
a. Click the network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. b. Select the network to which you want to connect. c. Click Connect. d. If required, enter the security key. 4. Test the wireless network by opening your Web browser and accessing a Web site. User Manual 27 5 Multimedia features The following section highlights the entertainment features of the computer. Using multimedia software The computer includes preinstalled multimedia software. To see a list of the software that is preinstalled on the computer, click Start, and then click All Programs. For details about using software included with the computer, refer to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided with the software, on disc, or on the manufacturers Web site. If you have an external optical drive (purchased separately), you can also perform the following multimedia tasks:
Playing digital media, including audio and video CDs, audio and video DVDs, and BDs Listening to Internet radio Creating (burning) data CDs Burning and editing audio CDs Burning and editing video DVDs or video CDs The external optical drive must be connected to the USB port on the computer, not to a USB port on another external device, such as a hub or docking station. Installing multimedia software from a disc Although your computer does not have an integrated optical drive, you can easily access software as well as install programs and access information in either of the following ways:
Connect an external optical drive (purchased separately) to one of the USB ports on your computer. Share an optical drive that is connected to another computer on your network. Refer to the Sharing optical drives section in Chapter 2 for additional information. User Manual 29 5 Multimedia features Using HP MediaSmart MediaSmart turns your computer into a mobile entertainment center. With MediaSmart, you can enjoy music and movies, and also manage and edit photo collections. To start MediaSmart, click Start, click All Programs, click HP, and then click HP MediaSmart. MediaSmart includes the following features:
Internet TVView a range of TV shows and channels, as well as the HP-TV channel streamed in full-screen mode to computers with an Internet connection. Photo and video upload support, for example:
Upload your MediaSmart photos to Internet photo storage sites, such as Snapfish. Upload your home videos (for example, fun videos created with the integrated webcam) directly to YouTube. Pandora Internet radio (North America only)Listen to music selected just for you, streamed from the Internet. Using the webcam Your computer includes an integrated webcam, located at the top of the display. With the preinstalled software, you can use the webcam to take a photo or record a video. You can then preview the photo or video recording, and save it on your computer hard drive. The webcam is a perfect companion to your instant messaging program. To access the webcam, click Start, click All Programs, click HP, click HP MediaSmart, and then click HP MediaSmart Webcam. The webcam software enables you to experiment with the following features:
Capturing and sharing video Streaming video with instant messaging software Taking still photos 30 User Manual 5 Multimedia features Using audio features Your computer enables you to use a variety of audio features:
Playing music using your computer speakers and/or connected external speakers. Controlling the bass with the Beats Audio feature (fn+b). Recording sound using the internal microphone, or connect an external microphone. Downloading music from the Internet. Creating multimedia presentations using audio and images. Transmitting sound and images with instant messaging programs. Streaming radio programs. Creating (burning) audio CDs with an optional optical drive. Using video features Your computer enables you to use a variety of video features:
Watch movies Play games over the Internet Edit pictures and video and create presentations Connect external video devices Watch TV over the Internet Connecting an external monitor or projector You can connect an external display such as a monitor or projector to the computer, using the HP HDMI to VGA Display Adapter (select models only). The adapter connects to the HDMI port on the computer. Connecting an HDMI device The computer includes an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) port. The HDMI port connects the computer to an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, or any compatible digital or audio component. For more information on multimedia features, refer to the HP ENVY 15 User Guide. To access this guide, click Start, click Help and Support, and then click User Guides. User Manual 31 6 Updating software Updating the software installed on the computer Most software, including the operating system, is updated frequently by the manufacturer or provider. Important updates to the software included with the computer may have been released since the computer left the factory. Some updates may affect the way the computer responds to optional software or external devices. Many updates provide security enhancements. Update the operating system and other software installed on the computer as soon as the computer is connected to the Internet. To access links for updating installed software, refer to Help and Support. Updating programs and drivers Updated versions of the software provided with your computer may be available on the HP Web site. Most software updates on the HP Web site are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information on installing and troubleshooting the file. For information on updating the BIOS, refer to the HP ENVY 15 User Guide. To access this guide, click Start, click Help and Support, and then click User Guides. To download and install software other than a BIOS update, follow these steps:
1. Open your Web browser, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and select your country or region. 2. Click the option for software and driver downloads, type your computer model number in the Search box, and then press enter. or If you want a specific SoftPaq, enter the SoftPaq number in the Search box, press enter, and then follow the instructions provided. Proceed to step 6. 3. Click your specific product from the models listed. 4. Select your operating system. 5. When the list of drivers is displayed, click an updated driver to open a window containing additional information. User Manual 33 6 Updating software 6. Click Install now to install the updated driver without downloading the file. or Click Download only to save the file to your computer. When prompted, click Save, and then select a storage location on your hard drive. After the file is downloaded, navigate to the folder where the file was stored, and double-click the file to install the driver. 7. If you are prompted to do so, restart your computer after the installation is complete, and then verify the operation of the device. 34 User Manual 7 Backup and recovery Tools provided by the operating system and by HP Recovery Manager software are designed to help you with the following tasks for safeguarding your information and restoring it in case of a system failure:
Backing up your information Creating a set of recovery discs Creating system restore points Recovering a program or driver Performing a full system recovery Creating recovery discs HP recommends that you create recovery discs to be sure that you can restore your system to its original factory state if you experience serious system failure or instability. Create these discs after setting up the computer for the first time. If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive, you can use an optional external optical drive (purchased separately) to create recovery discs, or you can purchase recovery discs for your computer from the HP Web site. The external optical drive must be connected to the USB port on the computer, not to a USB port on another external device, such as a hub or docking station. Handle these discs carefully and keep them in a safe place. The software allows the creation of only one set of recovery discs. Note the following guidelines before creating recovery discs:
You will need high-quality DVD-R, DVD+R, BD-R (writable Blu-ray) or CD-R discs. All these discs are purchased separately. DVDs have a larger storage capacity than CDs. If you use CDs, up to 20 discs may be required, whereas only a few DVDs are required. Double-layer discs and read-write discssuch as CD-RW, DVDRW, and BD-RE (rewritable Blu-ray) discsare not compatible with the Recovery Manager software. The computer must be connected to AC power during this process. Only one set of recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into an optical drive. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you open Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue the disc creation process. To create a set of recovery discs:
1. Click Start, click All Programs, click Recovery Manager, and then click Recovery Disc Creation. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. User Manual 35 7 Backup and recovery Backing up your information As you add new software and data files, you should back up your system on a regular basis to maintain a reasonably current backup. Back up your system at the following times:
At regularly scheduled times Set reminders to back up your information periodically. Before the computer is repaired or restored Before you add or modify hardware or software Note the following when backing up:
Create system restore points using the Windows System Restore feature, and periodically copy them to a disc. Store personal files in the Documents library, and periodically back up this folder. Back up templates stored in their associated programs. Save the customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of the settings. The screen shot can be a time-saver if you have to reset your preferences. To copy the screen and paste the image into a word-processing document:
a. Display the screen. b. Copy the screen:
To copy only the active window, press alt+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press prt sc. c. Open a word-processing document, click Edit, and then click Paste. d. Save the document. You can back up your information to an optional external hard drive, a network drive, or discs. When backing up to discs, use any of the following types of discs (purchased separately): CD-R, CD-RW, DVD+R, DVD-R, or DVDRW. The discs you use depend on the type of optical drive you are using. DVDs store more information than CDs, so using them for backup reduces the number of recovery discs required. When backing up to discs, number each disc before inserting it into an optical drive. 36 User Manual 7 Backup and recovery Using Windows Backup and Restore To create a backup using Windows Backup and Restore, follow these steps:
Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you start the backup process. The backup process may take over an hour, depending on file size and the speed of the computer. 1. Click Start, click All Programs, click Maintenance, and then click Backup and Restore. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up and create a backup. Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. Using system restore points When you back up your system, you are creating a system restore point. A system restore point allows you to save and name a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then revert back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system. Recovering to an earlier restore point does not affect data files saved or e-mails created since the last restore point. You also can create additional restore points to provide increased protection for your system files and settings. When to create restore points Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware. Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally. If you revert to a restore point and then change your mind, you can reverse the restoration. User Manual 37 7 Backup and recovery Creating a system restore point 1. Click Start, click Control Panel, click System and Security, and then click System. 2. In the left pane, click System protection. 3. Click the System Protection tab. 4. Under Protection Settings, select the disk for which you want to create a restore point. 5. Click Create. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions. Restoring to a previous date and time To revert to a restore point (created at a previous date and time) when the computer was functioning optimally, follow these steps:
1. Click Start, click Control Panel, click System and Security, and then click System. 2. In the left pane, click System protection. 3. Click the System Protection tab. 4. Click System Restore. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Performing a recovery You can recover only files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use Recovery Manager to create a set of recovery discs (entire drive backup) as soon as you set up your computer. Recovery Manager software allows you to repair or restore the system if you experience system failure or instability. Recovery Manager works from recovery discs that you create or from a dedicated recovery partition (select models only) on the hard drive. However, computers that include a solid-state drive (SSD) may not have a recovery partition. If that is the case, recovery discs have been included with your computer. Use these discs to recover your operating system and software. Windows has its own built-in repair features, such as System Restore. If you have not already tried these features, try them before using Recovery Manager. For more information on these built-in repair features, click Start, and then click Help and Support. Recovery Manager recovers only the software that was preinstalled at the factory. Software not provided with this computer must be downloaded from the manufacturers Web site or reinstalled from the disc provided by the manufacturer. 38 User Manual 7 Backup and recovery Recovering using the recovery discs To restore the system from the recovery discs:
1. Back up all personal files. 2. Insert the first recovery disc into an optional external optical drive, and restart the computer. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Recovering using the partition on the hard drive (select models only) On some models, you can perform a recovery from the partition on the hard drive, which is accessed by pressing either the Start button or f11. This restores the computer to its factory condition. Computers with an SSD may not have a recovery partition. If the computer does not have a recovery partition, you will not be able to recover using this procedure. Recovery discs have been included for computers that do not have a partition. Use these discs to recover your operating system and software. To restore the system from the partition, follow these steps:
1. Access Recovery Manager in either of the following ways:
Click Start, click All Programs, click Recovery Manager, and then click Recovery Manager. or a. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the esc key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. b. Press f11 while the Press <F11> for recovery message is displayed on the screen. It may take several minutes for Recovery Manager to load. 2. In the Recovery Manager window, click System Recovery. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. User Manual 39 A Product information and troubleshooting Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Input power Rating Operating voltage 19.5 V dc @ 6.50 A - 120W Operating current 6.50 A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label on the bottom of the computer. Operating environment Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C 41F to 95F Nonoperating
-20C to 60C
-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%
5% to 95%
10% to 90%
5% to 95%
-15 m to 3,048 m
-50 ft to 10,000 ft
-15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 40,000 ft User Manual 41 A Product information and troubleshooting Traveling with the computer For best results, follow these traveling and shipping tips:
Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:
1. Back up your information. 2. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as digital cards. To reduce the risk of damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, remove the media from a drive before removing the drive from a drive bay, and before shipping, storing, or traveling with a drive. 3. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. 4. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage, and do not check it in with the rest of your bags. Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, such as conveyor belts, use X-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a drive. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, check with the airline in advance. If the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. If the computer has a wireless device or a cell phone device installed, such as an 802.11b/g device, a Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) device, or a General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) device, the use of these devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply onboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a particular device, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:
Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 42 User Manual A Product information and troubleshooting Routine care Cleaning the display CAUTION: To prevent permanent damage to the computer, never spray water, cleaning fluids, or chemicals on the display. To remove smudges and lint, frequently clean the display with a soft, damp, lint-free cloth. If the screen requires additional cleaning, use premoistened antistatic wipes or an antistatic screen cleaner. Cleaning the TouchPad and keyboard Dirt and grease on the TouchPad can cause the pointer to jump around on the screen. To avoid this, clean the TouchPad with a damp cloth, and wash your hands frequently when using the computer. WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking, and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Troubleshooting resources If you experience computer problems, perform these troubleshooting steps in the sequence provided until the problem is resolved:
1. Refer to Quick troubleshooting, the next section in this chapter. 2. Access Web site links and additional information about the computer through Help and Support. Click Start, and then click Help and Support. Although many checkup and repair tools require an Internet connection, other tools, such as Help and Support, can help you fix a problem when the computer is offline. User Manual 43 A Product information and troubleshooting Quick troubleshooting The computer is unable to start up If the computer does not turn on when you press the power button, the following suggestions may help you resolve the problem:
If the computer is plugged into an AC outlet, unplug the computer, and then plug another electrical device into the outlet to be sure that the outlet is providing adequate power. Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved by HP for this computer. If the computer is running on battery power, or if it is plugged into an external power source other than an AC outlet, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Be sure that the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. The TouchPad is behaving erratically If the TouchPad is behaving erratically, follow these guidelines:
Be sure that TouchPad is on. If the TouchPad light is amber, quickly double-tap the TouchPad on/off button to turn on the TouchPad. If the TouchPad light is off, the TouchPad is on. Follow these guidelines when using the TouchPad:
Use one finger to navigate, click, or turn on/turn off the TouchPad. Use 2 fingers to control TouchPad gestures, such as scrolling, pinching/zooming, and rotating. To turn the TouchPad gestures off or explore other TouchPad features, click the Synaptics icon in the notification area at the far right of the taskbar, click the Device Settings tab, and then click Settings. The computer screen is blank If the screen is blank, but the computer is on and the power light is on, the computer may not be set to display the image on the computer screen. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press the switch screen image key. Software is functioning abnormally If the software is unresponsive or responds abnormally, follow these suggestions:
Restart the computer by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to Shut down, and then clicking Restart. If you cannot restart the computer using this procedure, refer to the next section, The computer is on but is not responding. Run a virus scan. For information about using the antivirus resources on the computer, refer to the antivirus software Help for more details. 44 User Manual A Product information and troubleshooting The computer is on but is not responding If the computer is on but is not responding to software or keyboard commands, try the following emergency shutdown procedures, in the sequence provided, until shutdown occurs:
CAUTION: Emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press and hold the power button on the computer for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. The computer is unusually warm It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. If you suspect that the computer is overheating, turn off the computer to allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Then be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. WARNING: To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. An external device is not working Follow these suggestions if an external device does not function as expected:
Turn on the device according to the manufacturers instructions. Be sure that all device connections are secure. Be sure that the device is receiving electrical power. Be sure that the device, especially if it is older, is compatible with the operating system. Be sure that the correct drivers are installed and updated. User Manual 45 A Product information and troubleshooting The wireless network connection is not working If a wireless network connection is not working as expected, follow these suggestions:
Click Start, click Control Panel, click Network and Internet, and then click Network and Sharing. Be sure that the wireless device is turned on (wireless light is off). If the light is amber, press the wireless key to turn on the wireless device. Be sure that the computer wireless antennas are free from obstructions. Be sure that the cable or DSL modem and its power cord are properly connected and that the lights are on. Be sure that the wireless router or access point is properly connected to its power adapter and the cable or DSL modem, and that the lights are on. Turn the wireless device off and then on again to resynchronize the device. Disconnect and then reconnect all cables, and turn the power off and then back on. For more information on wireless technology, refer to the relevant Help topics and Web site links in Help and Support. For information on activating mobile broadband service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. 46 User Manual Index A action keys, identifying 6 altitude specifications 41 audio features 31 B backing up 36 Beats Audio 12, 31 C cable, modem 23 cables and cords, power 44 calculator key 8 Chat 21 connecting to a wired network 24 connecting to an existing wireless network 25 D devices, external, troubleshooting 45 drivers, updating 33 E environmental specifications 41 external devices, troubleshooting 45 external monitor 31 H HDMI device 31 Help and Support key 6 HP HDMI to VGA Display Adapter 31 HP MediaSmart 30 humidity specifications 41 I Internet choosing an ISP 23 choosing type of access 23 wireless access 23 Internet service provider (ISP) 23 L LaunchBar icons, identifying 18 M mail key 8 media keys 7 Media Launch key 8 Microsoft Windows default power on 17 starting 17 monitor, external 45 multimedia software 29 Music Player 15 N notification icons, identifying 19 O one-touch launch keys, identifying 8 operating environment specifications 41 optical drive, sharing 13 overheating, computer 45 P partition 39 Photo Viewer 15 pinching gesture 11 power, turning on the computer 44 print options key 8 printer 45 programs, updating 33 Q QuickLock key 7 QuickWeb browsing photos 21 configuring the network 20 disabling or enabling 22 features 15 identifying 17 playing music 20 setting up 16 Settings Panel 20 QuickWeb software, using 5 User Manual 47 Web browser key 8 Web calendar 15 Web e-mail 15 webcam 30 Windows Backup and Restore 37 wireless Internet access 23 wireless network connection 25 Z zooming gesture 11 Index R recovery discs, creating 35 Recovery Manager 38, 39 recovery, performing 38 recovery, system 35 regulatory information notices 4 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 4 S screen brightness keys 6 scrolling gesture 10 Skype 21 software multimedia 29 safeguarding information 35 updating 33 specifications altitude 41 humidity 41 operating environment 41 temperature 41 switch screen image key 6 system recovery 35 system restore points 37 T temperature specifications 41 troubleshooting 45 TouchPad gestures 9 troubleshooting 43 external device problems 45 overheating problems 45 resources 43 software problems 44 virus problems 44 wireless network problems 46 turning on the computer 44 V vents, precautions 45 video features 31 volume keys 7 W Web browser 15 48 User Manual
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Host user manual 2 of 2 | Users Manual | 1.02 MiB |
Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 20082010 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. ENERGY STAR is a registered mark owned by the U.S. government. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Ninth Edition: December 2010 First Edition: August 2008 Document Part Number: 506242-009 Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices .......................................................................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ..... 2 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................. 3 Brazil notice .......................................................................................................................................... 4 Canada notices .................................................................................................................................... 4 Avis Canadien ...................................................................................................................................... 4 European Union Regulatory notices ..................................................................................................... 4 Products with HP Mobile Broadband Modules .................................................................... 6 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................... 6 Germany ............................................................................................................. 6 Japan notices ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices ............................................................................................ 7 Bluetooth devices ................................................................................................................ 8 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................... 8 South Korea notice ............................................................................................................................... 8 Mexico notice ....................................................................................................................................... 8 Singapore wireless notice .................................................................................................................... 8 Thailand WWAN wireless notice .......................................................................................................... 9 Taiwan notices ..................................................................................................................................... 9 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................ 9 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 9 Vietnam Compliance Marking Notice ................................................................................................... 9 Airline travel notice ............................................................................................................................. 10 Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 10 ENERGY STAR compliance .............................................................................................................. 10 Laser compliance ............................................................................................................................... 11 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 11 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 12 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 12 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................. 14 iii Canada modem statements ............................................................................................... 15 Japan modem statements ................................................................................................. 16 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 16 Voice support .................................................................................................... 17 Power cord notice ............................................................................................................................... 17 Japan power cord notice .................................................................................................... 17 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................... 17 2 Safety notices ................................................................................................................................................ 18 Heat-related safety warning notice ..................................................................................................... 18 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................... 18 Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 18 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 19 Power cord notices ............................................................................................................................. 19 Cleaning the keyboard ....................................................................................................................... 19 Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................... 19 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................... 20 3 Environmental notices ................................................................................................................................. 21 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ......................................................................................... 21 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ....................... 21 Chemical substances ......................................................................................................................... 21 China material content declarations ................................................................................................... 22 Japan material content declaration .................................................................................................... 24 Turkey EEE regulation ....................................................................................................................... 24 United States mercury disposal .......................................................................................................... 25 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................ 25 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 26 iv 1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply on-board airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, choose the procedure below that corresponds to the operating system running on your computer. For Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:
1. 2. Select Start > My Computer. If the left pane, select View System Information > Hardware tab > Device Manager. For Windows Vista, follow these steps:
1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. For later Windows operating systems, such as Windows 7, follow these steps:
Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Device Manager. For non-Windows operating systems, follow the instructions provided by your operating system to identify a hardware device such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device. Regulatory markings for your country or region may be located on the bottom of the product, either under the battery, under a user-removable door (or some other user-accessible location), or on the wireless or modem module. To view the FCC IDs for any radio modules in your notebook (Bluetooth, WLAN, or WWAN), follow these steps:
1. 2. 3. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the "Press the ESC key for Startup Menu" message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. Select the System Configuration menu. 1 The FCC IDs are displayed at the bottom of the screen. CAUTION: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not have an FCC ID. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo
(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:
1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 12 inches: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides. To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 12 inches: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides. To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Wireless operation is subject to two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union Regulatory notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EC Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC where applicable CE compliance of this product is valid if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has wired and/or wireless telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of EU Directive R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to applicable harmonized European standards
(European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices product family and available (in English only) either within the product documentation or at the following Web site: www.hp.eu/certificates (type the product number in the search box). The compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product:
For non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth, within power class below 10 mW. For EU non-harmonized telecommunications products (if applicable, a 4-digit notified body number is inserted between CE and ! (the exclamation mark). Please refer to the regulatory label provided on the product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. The telephone connector (not available for all products) is intended for connection to analog telephone networks. NOTE: For products with wireless LAN devices, some countries may have specific obligations or special requirements about the operation of wireless LAN networks such as indoor use only or restrictions of the channels available. Be sure that the country settings of the wireless network are correct. In France, certain restrictions apply for the 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product. This product may be used indoors for the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 to 13). For outdoor use, only the 2400-MHz to 2454-MHz frequency band (channels 1 to 7) may be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.arcep.fr. The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS: HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. European Union Regulatory notices 5 Products with HP Mobile Broadband Modules THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO FREQUENCY RADIATION. The HP Mobile Broadband Module in your notebook is a radio transmitter and receiver. The device is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines that establish permitted levels of RF radiation for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The device also meets the European R&TTE directives, including the protection of the health and the safety of the user and any other person. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR).* The SAR was obtained by testing the device at standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value, because the device operates at multiple power levels and uses only the power required to reach the network. When installed in the notebook computer, this device meets RF exposure guidelines when the antennas are positioned at a minimum distance from the body. In order to transmit data or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data or messages may be delayed until such a connection becomes available. Be sure that the recommended distance is observed until the transmission is complete.
*The non-FCC, international guidelines state that the SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Ergonomics notice Germany Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the ergonomic requirements and are suitable only for short-time use of VDU tasks. When a mobile computer is used for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit (VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000:2008 This device is intended for use at visual display workplaces in compliance with BildscharbV, only with external keyboard and adequate external monitor. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sun light) reflections may occur which result in reduced readability. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG
(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000:2008 Das Gert ist fr die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gem BildscharbV nur mit externer Tastatur und geeignetem Monitor vorgesehen. Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. Japan notices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Japan notices 7 Bluetooth devices Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. South Korea notice Mexico notice La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) este equipo puede que no cause interferencia y (2) este equipo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo interferencia que pueda ser causada por la operacin no deseada. Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Thailand WWAN wireless notice This telecom equipment has complied with NTC regulations. Taiwan notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Vietnam Compliance Marking Notice This marking is for applicable products only. Thailand WWAN wireless notice 9 Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Battery notices WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. For information about removing a battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. ENERGY STAR compliance HP computers marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are qualified with the applicable U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR specifications for computers. The EPA ENERGY STAR logo does not imply endorsement by the EPA. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has determined that the products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR qualified as per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. The following logo will appear on all ENERGY STAR qualified computers:
The ENERGY STAR program for computers was created by the EPA to promote energy efficiency and reduce air pollution through more energy-efficient equipment in homes, offices, and factories. One way that products achieve this goal is by using the Microsoft Windows power management feature to reduce power consumption when the product is not in use. The power management feature allows the computer to initiate a low-power or Sleep mode after a period of user inactivity. When used with an external ENERGY STAR qualified monitor, this feature also supports similar power management features of the monitor. To take advantage of these potential energy savings, the power management feature has been preset to behave in the following ways when the system is operating on AC power:
Turn off the display after 15 minutes Initiate Sleep after 30 minutes 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:
Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:
Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Laser compliance 11 Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Modem notices 13 U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:
14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Modem notices 15 Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:
New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:
a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). 16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japan power cord notice Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Power cord notice 17 2 Safety notices Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer: crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. Battery notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. 18 Chapter 2 Safety notices Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING! Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. If the computer includes a headset or earphones, this combination is in compliance to EN 50332-1. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-
pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Cleaning the keyboard WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Headset and earphone volume level notice 19 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. 20 Chapter 2 Safety notices 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Electronic hardware and battery recycling 21 China material content declarations The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Lead
(Pb) Mercury
(Hg) Cadmium
(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium
(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers
(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 22 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Part Name Keyboard Liquid crystal display
(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner USB flash memory drive USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Lead
(Pb) Mercury
(Hg) Cadmium
(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium
(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers
(PBDE) X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment and its amendments. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. China material content declarations 23 Japan material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Turkey EEE regulation In Conformity with the EEE regulation EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur 24 Chapter 3 Environmental notices United States mercury disposal This HP product contains the following materials that might require special handling at end-of-life:
Mercury in the fluorescent lamp in the display LCD Disposal of mercury can be regulated because of environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) http://www.eiae.org. NOTE: Notebook computers configured with LED backlights do not contain mercury lamps. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. United States mercury disposal 25 Index A airline travel notice 10 B battery notice 10, 18, 25 battery recycling 21 Brazil notice 4 C cable grounding notice 20 Canada modem statement 15 Canada notices 4 Canadian French notices 4 China Material Content Declarations 22 D Declaration of Conformity 2 disposal notices battery 10, 25 equipment 21 mercury 25 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 21 ENERGY STAR compliance 10 environmental notices 21 equipment disposal notice 21 ergonomics notice 6 European Union notices 4 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 26 Index G GS Notice 6 H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 19 J Japan material content declaration 24 Japan modem statement 16 Japan notice 7 Japan power cord notice 17 K keyboard notice 19 L laser safety notice 11 M Macrovision Corporation notice 17 mercury disposal notice 25 Mexico wireless notice 8 modem notices 11 modem statements Canada 15 Japan 16 New Zealand 16 U.S. 12 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 N New Zealand modem statement 16 notices airline travel 10 battery 10, 18, 25 Brazil 4 Canada 4 Canadian French 4 environmental 21 equipment disposal 21 ergonomics 6 European Union 4 Federal Communications Commission 2 headset and earphone volume level 19 Japan 7 Japan power cord 17 keyboard 19 laser safety 11 Macrovision Corporation 17 mercury disposal 25 Mexico 8 modem 11 perchlorate material 25 power cords 17, 19 Singapore 8 South Korea 8 Taiwan 9 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 9 travel 19 Vietnam compliance marking 9 P power cord notice 17, 19 R recycling, electronic hardware and battery 21 S Singapore wireless notice 8 South Korea notice 8 T Taiwan notice 9 Thailand WWAN wireless notice travel notice 19 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 9 20 U U.S. modem statement 12 V Vietnam compliance marking notice 9 voice support 17 volume level notice, headset and earphone 19 W wireless LAN devices 3 Index 27
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Installation Guide | Users Manual | 181.18 KiB | / September 05 2010 |
OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044; IC: 4324A-BRCM1044 Conditions on using BRCM regulatory approvals:
Customer must ensure that its product (the CUSTOMER Product) is electrically A. identical to Broadcoms reference designs. Customer acknowledges that any modifications to Broadcoms reference designs may invalidate regulatory approvals in relation to the CUSTOMER Product, or may necessitate notifications to the relevant regulatory authorities. Customer is responsible for ensuring that antennas used with the product are of B. the same type, with same or lower gains as approved and providing antenna reports to Broadcom. Customer is responsible for regression testing to accommodate changes to C. Broadcoms reference designs, new antennas, and portable RF exposure safety testing/approvals. Appropriate labels must be affixed to the CUSTOMER Product that comply with D. applicable regulations in all respects. E. product that contains the text as required by applicable law. Without limitation of the foregoing, an example (for illustration purposes only) of possible text to include is set forth below:
A users manual or instruction manual must be included with the customer 1. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. INFORMATION TO USER:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the Page 1 of 8 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044; IC: 4324A-BRCM1044 user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.
-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. CAUTION: (this only applicable to 5GHz device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. System integrators must include the FCC ID on the end product. FCC Radio-Frequency Exposure & Approval Conditions:
1. Antennas must be installed in the display section of Netbook/notebook/laptop computer to provide at least 16cm separation distance from the transmitting antenna to the body of user during normal operating condition. 2. Transmitting antenna(s) can only be installed at the display section of computer. When this device is installed other than notebook computers, at least 20 cm separation distance shall be maintained between the transmitting antenna(s) to the body of user or nearby person. 3. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. 4. Only those antennas with same type and lesser gain filed under this FCC ID number can be used with this device. 5. The regulatory label on the final system must include the statement: Contains FCC Page 2 of 8 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044; IC: 4324A-BRCM1044 ID: QDS-BRCM1044 and/or IC: 4324A-BRCM1044 or using electronic labeling method as documented in KDB 784748. 6. The final system integrator must ensure there is no instruction provided in the user manual or customer documentation indicating how to install or remove the transmitter module except such device has implemented two-ways authentication between module and the host system. 7. The final host manual shall include the following regulatory statement:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.
-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter Page 3 of 8 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044; IC: 4324A-BRCM1044 tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. Caution: (this only applicable to UNII device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. System integrators must include the IC ID on the end product. 3. Europe - EU Restrictions This equipment needs to be marked with the throughout the European community. 0984 symbol and can be used Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. Information to be supplied to the users:
802.11a Restrictions:
- This product is for indoor use only when using channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, or 64 (5150 5350 MHz).
- DFS and TPC must remain enabled to ensure product compliance with EC regulations.
- To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to select the country in which the access point is installed. Page 4 of 8 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044; IC: 4324A-BRCM1044
- This product can be used as shown in the table below:
5 GHz wireless LAN IEEE 802.11a Indoor Use Only A, AND, B, CH, D, CY, CZ, DK, ES, EST, F, FIN, FL, FR, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, IS, L, LT, M, MC, N, NL, P, PL, RSM, S, SK, SLO, V Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Czech:
User's Manual in Czech language and a statement of conformity with Directive 1999/5/EC in Czech language must be enclosed to each product. France:
2.4GHz for Metropolitan France:
In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:
Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Note for system integrators:
- The module is tested to comply with the requirement of the R&TTE Directive. System integrators are responsible for compliance of the final device with the R&TTE Directive.
- Packaging: CE Marking must also be on the outer packaging of the product. The outer packaging must also provide an indication as to where the device is intended to be used and OR conversely, where there may be restrictions for use. 4. Taiwan - NCC Statement to be included in the user guide Statement- For general products Page 5 of 8 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044; IC: 4324A-BRCM1044 Additional Statement - For 5G Band products 5.25G ~5.35G Translation:
Article 12 Without permission, any company, firm or user shall not alter the frequency, increase the power, or change the characteristics and functions of the original design of the certified lower power frequency electric machinery. Article 14 The application of low power frequency electric machineries shall not affect the navigation safety nor interfere a legal communication, if an interference is found, the service will be suspended until improvement is made and the interference no longer exists. The foregoing legal communication refers to the wireless telecommunication operated according to the telecommunications laws and regulations. The low power frequency electric machinery should be able to tolerate the interference of the electric wave radiation electric machineries and equipments for legal communications or industrial and scientific applications. Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Appendix:
(ID):
CCXXxxLPyyyZz
,, Page 6 of 8 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044; IC: 4324A-BRCM1044 CCXXxxLPyyyZz . 5. Korea Include the following statement either on the label or in the User Guide.
6. Argentina The current approval is in the name of Broadcoms local representative. It may be necessary to obtain regulatory approval in the name of the local distributor or importer. We suggest manufacturers check with their local distributors and importers in Argentina. 7. Brazil - Anatel Before using Broadcom Anatel approvals, 1. PC- OEM must make arrangement for its local offices or distributors to provide maintenance, technical assistance or replace any faulty products sold in Brazil. 2. All warranty services will be provided by the distributors or PC-OEM sales support in Brazil. An official agreement stating warranty responsibilities must be signed and made available to Broadcom. Interference statement to be included in the Users Guide
"Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio."
Translation:
"This equipment operates in secondary character. It can be affected by harmful interference. However, it cannot cause interference to systems operating in primary character."
8. South Africa ICASA PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to supply spare parts and carry out repairs in South Africa. Page 7 of 8 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044; IC: 4324A-BRCM1044 9. Indonesia - POSTEL PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to provide product warranty and after sales services. 10. Japan MIC Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Page 8 of 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | OEM Installation guide | Users Manual | 279.08 KiB |
OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM94312HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044; IC: 4324A-BRCM1044 Conditions on using BRCM regulatory approvals:
Customer must ensure that its product (the CUSTOMER Product) is electrically A. identical to Broadcoms reference designs. Customer acknowledges that any modifications to Broadcoms reference designs may invalidate regulatory approvals in relation to the CUSTOMER Product, or may necessitate notifications to the relevant regulatory authorities. Customer is responsible for ensuring that antennas used with the product are of B. the same type, with same or lower gains as approved and providing antenna reports to Broadcom. Customer is responsible for regression testing to accommodate changes to C. Broadcoms reference designs, new antennas, and portable RF exposure safety testing/approvals. Appropriate labels must be affixed to the CUSTOMER Product that comply with D. applicable regulations in all respects. E. product that contains the text as required by applicable law. Without limitation of the foregoing, an example (for illustration purposes only) of possible text to include is set forth below:
A users manual or instruction manual must be included with the customer Page 1 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM94312HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044; IC: 4324A-BRCM1044 Antenna placement (at 1.8cm separation distance) 1.8cm Page 2 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM94312HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044; IC: 4324A-BRCM1044 1. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. INFORMATION TO USER:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.
-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. CAUTION: (this only applicable to 5GHz device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. System integrators must include the FCC ID on the end product. FCC Radio-Frequency Exposure & Approval Conditions:
1. Antennas must be installed in the display section of Netbook/notebook/laptop computer to provide at least 1.8cm separation distance from the transmitting antenna to the body of user during normal operating condition. Page 3 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM94312HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044; IC: 4324A-BRCM1044 2. Transmitting antenna(s) can only be installed at the display section of computer. When this device is installed other than notebook computers, at least 20 cm separation distance shall be maintained between the transmitting antenna(s) to the body of user or nearby person. 3. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. 4. Only those antennas with same type and lesser gain filed under this FCC ID number can be used with this device. 5. The regulatory label on the final system must include the statement: Contains FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044 and/or IC: 4324A-BRCM1044 or using electronic labeling method as documented in KDB 784748. 6. The final system integrator must ensure there is no instruction provided in the user manual or customer documentation indicating how to install or remove the transmitter module except such device has implemented two-ways authentication between module and the host system. 7. The final host manual shall include the following regulatory statement:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.
-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) Page 4 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM94312HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044; IC: 4324A-BRCM1044 Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. Caution: (this only applicable to UNII device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. For portable configurations, antennas must be installed in the display section of Netbook/notebook/laptop to provide at least 1.8cm separation distance from the transmitting antenna to the body of user during normal operating condition. System integrators must include the IC ID on the end product. Industry Canada user statements should be provided in both English and French, at the time each product is offered for sale or lease in Canada. 3. Europe - EU Restrictions This equipment needs to be marked with the throughout the European community. 0984 symbol and can be used Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. Information to be supplied to the users:
Page 5 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM94312HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044; IC: 4324A-BRCM1044 802.11a Restrictions:
- This product is for indoor use only when using channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, or 64 (5150 5350 MHz).
- DFS and TPC must remain enabled to ensure product compliance with EC regulations.
- To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to select the country in which the access point is installed.
- This product can be used as shown in the table below:
5 GHz wireless LAN IEEE 802.11a Indoor Use Only A, AND, B, CH, D, CY, CZ, DK, ES, EST, F, FIN, FL, FR, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, IS, L, LT, M, MC, N, NL, P, PL, RSM, S, SK, SLO, V Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Czech:
User's Manual in Czech language and a statement of conformity with Directive 1999/5/EC in Czech language must be enclosed to each product. France:
2.4GHz for Metropolitan France:
In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:
Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Note for system integrators:
- The module is tested to comply with the requirement of the R&TTE Directive. System integrators are responsible for compliance of the final device with the R&TTE Directive. Page 6 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM94312HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044; IC: 4324A-BRCM1044
- Packaging: CE Marking must also be on the outer packaging of the product. The outer packaging must also provide an indication as to where the device is intended to be used and OR conversely, where there may be restrictions for use. 4. Taiwan - NCC Statement to be included in the user guide Statement- For general products Additional Statement - For 5G Band products 5.25G ~5.35G Translation:
Article 12 Without permission, any company, firm or user shall not alter the frequency, increase the power, or change the characteristics and functions of the original design of the certified lower power frequency electric machinery. Article 14 The application of low power frequency electric machineries shall not affect the navigation safety nor interfere a legal communication, if an interference is found, the service will be suspended until improvement is made and the interference no longer exists. The foregoing legal communication refers to the wireless telecommunication operated according to the telecommunications laws and regulations. The low power frequency electric machinery should be able to tolerate the interference of the electric wave radiation electric machineries and equipments for legal communications or industrial and scientific applications. Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Appendix:
(ID):
Page 7 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM94312HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044; IC: 4324A-BRCM1044 CCXXxxLPyyyZz
,, CCXXxxLPyyyZz . 5. Korea Include the following statement either on the label or in the User Guide.
6. Argentina The current approval is in the name of Broadcoms local representative. It may be necessary to obtain regulatory approval in the name of the local distributor or importer. We suggest manufacturers check with their local distributors and importers in Argentina. 7. Brazil - Anatel Before using Broadcom Anatel approvals, 1. PC- OEM must make arrangement for its local offices or distributors to provide maintenance, technical assistance or replace any faulty products sold in Brazil. 2. All warranty services will be provided by the distributors or PC-OEM sales support in Brazil. An official agreement stating warranty responsibilities must be signed and made available to Broadcom. Interference statement to be included in the Users Guide
"Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio."
Translation:
"This equipment operates in secondary character. It can be affected by harmful interference. However, it cannot cause interference to systems operating in primary character."
Page 8 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM94312HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044; IC: 4324A-BRCM1044 8. South Africa ICASA PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to supply spare parts and carry out repairs in South Africa. 9. Indonesia - POSTEL PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to provide product warranty and after sales services. 10. Japan MIC Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Page 9 of 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | User Manual I70C | Users Manual | 3.59 MiB | / September 12 2009 |
Mini User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your device. To obtain the latest information in the Mini User Guide, go to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/support. Copyright 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: May 2009 Document Part Number: 530935-001 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the device, do not place the device directly on your lap or obstruct the device air vents. Use the device only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The device and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
iii iv Safety warning notice Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Table of contents 1 Knowing the parts Identifying the hardware ....................................................................................................................... 1 Top components .................................................................................................................. 1 TouchPad ............................................................................................................ 1 Light .................................................................................................................... 2 Keys .................................................................................................................... 2 Front components ................................................................................................................ 3 Right-side components ........................................................................................................ 4 Left-side components .......................................................................................................... 5 Display components ............................................................................................................ 6 Bottom components ............................................................................................................. 7 Wireless antennas ............................................................................................................... 8 Additional hardware components ........................................................................................ 8 Identifying the labels ............................................................................................................................. 9 2 Power management Setting power options ......................................................................................................................... 10 Using power-saving states ................................................................................................. 10 Initiating and exiting Standby ............................................................................ 10 Initiating and exiting Hibernation ....................................................................... 10 Using power schemes ....................................................................................................... 11 Viewing the current scheme .............................................................................. 11 Selecting a different power scheme .................................................................. 11 Customizing power schemes ............................................................................ 12 Setting password protection upon exiting Standby ............................................................ 12 Using external AC power .................................................................................................................... 12 Connecting the AC adapter ............................................................................................... 13 Using battery power ........................................................................................................................... 13 Displaying the remaining battery charge ........................................................................... 14 Inserting or removing the battery ....................................................................................... 14 Charging a battery ............................................................................................................. 15 Maximizing battery discharge time .................................................................................... 16 Managing low battery levels .............................................................................................. 16 Identifying low battery levels ............................................................................. 16 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................. 17 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ....... 17 Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available ........................................................................................... 17 v Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ........................................................................................... 17 Resolving a low battery level when the device cannot exit Hibernation ....................................................................................... 17 Calibrating a battery ........................................................................................................... 17 Step 1: Fully charge the battery ........................................................................ 17 Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Standby ......................................................... 18 Step 3: Discharge the battery ............................................................................ 18 Step 4: Fully recharge the battery ..................................................................... 19 Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Standby ...................................................... 19 Conserving battery power .................................................................................................. 19 Storing a battery ................................................................................................................ 19 Disposing of a used battery ............................................................................................... 19 Shutting down the device ................................................................................................................... 20 3 Internet Connecting to a wired network ........................................................................................................... 21 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................... 22 Using wireless devices ...................................................................................................... 22 Identifying wireless and network status icons ................................................... 22 Using the wireless controls ............................................................................... 23 Using the wireless switch .................................................................................. 23 Using HP Connection Manager software (select models only) ......................... 23 Using HP Wireless Assistant software .............................................................. 24 Using a WLAN ................................................................................................................... 24 Setting up a WLAN ............................................................................................ 25 Protecting your WLAN ....................................................................................... 25 Connecting to a WLAN ...................................................................................... 26 Roaming to another network ............................................................................. 27 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) ............................................................................. 27 Inserting a SIM ................................................................................................................... 28 Removing a SIM ................................................................................................................ 29 Using the HP Mobile Broadband Setup Utility (select models only) ................................................... 29 4 Multimedia Multimedia features ............................................................................................................................ 30 Identifying your multimedia components ........................................................................... 30 Adjusting the volume ......................................................................................................... 31 Multimedia software ........................................................................................................................... 32 Using other preinstalled multimedia software .................................................................... 33 Installing multimedia software from the Internet ................................................................ 33 Audio .................................................................................................................................................. 33 Connecting external audio devices .................................................................................... 33 vi Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Checking your audio functions ........................................................................................... 33 Video .................................................................................................................................................. 34 Connecting an external monitor or projector ...................................................................... 34 Webcam ............................................................................................................................................. 35 5 Security Protecting the device .......................................................................................................................... 36 Using passwords ................................................................................................................................ 36 Passwords set in Windows ................................................................................................ 37 Passwords set in Setup Utility ........................................................................................... 37 Administrator password ..................................................................................... 38 Managing an administrator password ............................................... 38 Entering an administrator password ................................................. 38 Power-on password .......................................................................................... 38 Managing a power-on password ...................................................... 39 Entering a power-on password ......................................................... 39 Using antivirus software ..................................................................................................................... 39 Using firewall software ....................................................................................................................... 39 Installing critical updates .................................................................................................................... 40 6 Digital cards Inserting a digital card ........................................................................................................................ 41 Stopping and removing a digital card ................................................................................................. 42 7 USB devices Using a USB device ........................................................................................................................... 43 Connecting a USB device .................................................................................................. 43 Stopping and removing a USB device ............................................................................... 43 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Setting pointing device preferences ................................................................................................... 45 Using pointing devices ....................................................................................................................... 45 Using the TouchPad .......................................................................................................... 45 Connecting an external mouse .......................................................................................... 45 Using the keyboard ............................................................................................................................ 45 Using hotkeys .................................................................................................................... 45 Initiating Standby (fn+f1) ................................................................................... 46 Switching the screen image (fn+f2) ................................................................... 47 Decreasing screen brightness (fn+f3) ............................................................... 47 Increasing screen brightness (fn+f4) ................................................................. 47 Initiating QuickLock (fn+f6) ................................................................................ 47 Muting speaker sound (fn+f8) ........................................................................... 47 Decreasing speaker sound (fn+f10) .................................................................. 48 vii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Increasing speaker sound (fn+f11) .................................................................... 48 9 Drives Identifying installed drives .................................................................................................................. 49 Handling drives ................................................................................................................................... 49 Using external drives .......................................................................................................................... 49 Using optional external devices ......................................................................................... 50 10 Memory modules 11 Updating software Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 54 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................... 54 Downloading a BIOS update ............................................................................................. 55 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................... 56 12 Setup Utility Starting the Setup Utility ..................................................................................................................... 57 Using the Setup Utility ........................................................................................................................ 57 Changing the language of the Setup Utility ....................................................................... 57 Navigating and selecting in the Setup Utility ...................................................................... 57 Displaying system information ........................................................................................... 58 Restoring default settings in the Setup Utility .................................................................... 58 Exiting the Setup Utility ...................................................................................................... 58 Setup Utility menus ............................................................................................................................ 58 Main menu ......................................................................................................................... 59 Security menu .................................................................................................................... 59 System Configuration menu .............................................................................................. 59 Diagnostics menu .............................................................................................................. 60 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 61 viii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
1 Knowing the parts Identifying the hardware Components included with the device may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features on most device models. To see a list of hardware installed in the device, follow these steps:
1. 2. 3. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. Select Start > My Computer. In the left pane of the System Tasks window, select View system information. Select Hardware tab > Device Manager. Top components TouchPad Component
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4) Left TouchPad button*
TouchPad*
TouchPad scroll zone Right TouchPad button*
Description Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Scrolls up or down. Functions like the right button on an external mouse.
*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Identifying the hardware 1 Light Keys Component Caps lock light Description On: Caps lock is on. Component
(1) Function keys Description Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. 2 Chapter 1 Knowing the parts Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Component Description
(2)
(3)
(4) fn key Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Front components Component
(1) Power light
(2) Power switch
(3) Drive light Description On: The device is on. Blinking: The device is in Standby. Off: The device is off or in Hibernation. When the device is off, slide the switch to turn on the device. When the device is on, briefly slide the switch to initiate Hibernation. When the device is in Standby, briefly slide the switch to exit Standby. When the device is in Hibernation, briefly slide the switch to exit Hibernation. If the device has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, slide and hold the power switch for at least 5 seconds to turn off the device. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. Blinking: The hard drive or flash drive is being accessed. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Identifying the hardware 3 Component
(4) Battery light
(5) Wireless light
(6) Wireless switch Right-side components Description On: A battery is charging. Blinking: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the device is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the device are fully charged. If the device is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blue: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, is on. Amber: All wireless devices are off. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not establish a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. Component Description
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4) USB ports (2) Connect optional USB devices. Digital Media Slot Supports the following optional digital card formats:
Memory stick (MS) MS/Pro MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card xD-Picture card Connects an optional external display, such as a monitor or projector, to the device. External monitor port RJ-45 (network) jack Connects a network cable. 4 Chapter 1 Knowing the parts Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Left-side components Component Description
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the device. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the device from being mishandled or stolen. Power connector Connects an AC adapter. Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The device fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. USB port Connects an optional USB device. Audio-out (headphones) jack/Audio-in (microphone) jack Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or television audio. Also connects an optional headset microphone. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. NOTE: When an audio component is connected to the jack, the device speakers are disabled. The audio component cable must have a 4conductor connector. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Identifying the hardware 5 Display components Component
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5) Speakers (2) Internal display switch Webcam Webcam light Internal microphone Description Produce sound. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. NOTE: The display switch is not visible from the outside of the device. Captures still photographs and videos. NOTE: To capture videos, you will need to install additional webcam software. On: The webcam is in use. Records sound. 6 Chapter 1 Knowing the parts Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Bottom components Component
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4) Battery bay Description Holds the battery. Battery release latches (2) Release the battery from the battery bay. Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The device fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Memory module compartment Contains the memory module slot. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Identifying the hardware 7 Wireless antennas Component Description
(1)
(2) WWAN antennas (2) (select models only)*
WLAN antennas (2)*
Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide-area networks (WWANs). Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs).
*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the device. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. To see wireless regulatory notices, refer to the section of the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access these notices, click Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Additional hardware components 8 Chapter 1 Knowing the parts Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Component
(1)
(2)
(3) Power cord*
AC adapter Battery*
Description Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Converts AC power to DC power. Powers the device when the device is not plugged into external power.
*Batteries and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. Identifying the labels The labels affixed to the device provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the device. Service tagProvides important information including the following:
Product name (1). This is the product name affixed to the front of your device. Serial number (s/n) (2). This is an alphanumeric identifier that is unique to each product. Part Number/Product number (p/n) (3). This number provides specific information about the hardware components of the product. The part number helps a service technician to determine what components and parts are needed. Model description (4). This is the alphanumeric identifier you use to locate documents, drivers, and support for your device. Warranty period (5). This number describes the duration (in years) of the warranty period for this device. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the device. Microsoft Certificate of AuthenticityContains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the device. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the device, including the following:
Information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The serial number of your HP Mobile Broadband Module (select models only). The regulatory label is affixed inside the battery bay. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Identifying the labels 9 2 Power management Setting power options Using power-saving states The device has two power-saving states enabled at the factory: Standby and Hibernation. When Standby is initiated, the power light blinks and the screen clears. Your work is saved to memory. Exiting Standby is faster than exiting Hibernation. If the device is in Standby for an extended period or if the battery reaches a critical battery level while in Standby, the device initiates Hibernation. When Hibernation is initiated, your work is saved to a hibernation file on the hard drive and the device turns off. CAUTION: To prevent possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Standby or Hibernation while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any device functions while the device is in Standby or in Hibernation. Initiating and exiting Standby The system is set at the factory to initiate Standby after 10 minutes of inactivity when running on battery power and 25 minutes of inactivity when running on external power. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. With the device on, you can initiate Standby in any of the following ways:
Press fn+f1. Click Start > Turn Off Computer > Stand By. To exit Standby:
Briefly slide the power switch. When the device exits Standby, the power light turns on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:
Windows password before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required when the device exits Standby, you must enter your Initiating and exiting Hibernation The system is set at the factory to initiate Hibernation after 30 minutes of inactivity when running on battery power or when the battery reaches a critical battery level. NOTE: The system will not initiate Hibernation when running on external power. NOTE: To reduce the risk of information loss, periodically save your work. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. 10 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Select Start > Turn Off Computer. To initiate Hibernation:
1. 2. Hold down the shift key and select Hibernate. or If the device is on, briefly slide the power switch. To exit Hibernation:
Briefly slide the power switch. When the device exits Hibernation, the power light turns on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:
your Windows password before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required when the device exits Hibernation, you must enter Using power schemes A power scheme is a collection of system settings that manages how the device uses power. Power schemes can help you conserve power and maximize device performance. The following power schemes are available:
Portable/Laptop (recommended) Home/Office Desk Presentation Always On Minimal Power Management Max Battery You can change the settings of these power plans through Power Options. Viewing the current scheme Click the Power Meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. Selecting a different power scheme Click the Power Meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select a power scheme from the list. or a. b. Select a power scheme from the Power schemes list. c. Click OK. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Setting power options 11 Customizing power schemes Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. Select a power scheme from the Power schemes list. 1. 2. 3. Modify the Plugged in and Running on batteries settings as needed. 4. Click OK. Setting password protection upon exiting Standby To set the device to prompt for a password when the device exits Standby, follow these steps:
1. Right-click the Power Meter icon in the notification area, and then click Adjust Power Properties. 2. Click the Advanced tab. 3. 4. Click Apply. Select the Prompt for password when computer resumes from standby check box. Using external AC power External AC power is supplied through one of the following devices:
WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the device, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. Approved AC adapter Optional docking device or optional expansion product Connect the device to external AC power under any of the following conditions:
WARNING! Do not charge the device battery while you are onboard aircraft. When you are charging or calibrating a battery When you are installing or modifying system software When you are writing information to a CD or DVD When you connect the device to external AC power, the following events occur:
The battery begins to charge. If the device is turned on, the battery meter icon in the notification area changes appearance. When you disconnect external AC power, the following events occur:
The device switches to battery power. The display brightness is automatically decreased to save battery life. To increase display brightness, press the fn+f4 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. 12 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Connecting the AC adapter WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the device by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the device). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-
pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. To connect the device to external AC power, follow these steps:
1. 2. 3. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector (1) on the device. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter (2). Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet (3). Using battery power When a charged battery is in the device and the device is not plugged into external power, the device runs on battery power. When the device is plugged into external AC power, the device runs on AC power. If the device contains a charged battery and is running on external AC power supplied through the AC adapter, the device switches to battery power if the AC adapter is disconnected from the device. NOTE: The display brightness is decreased to save battery life when you disconnect AC power. To increase display brightness, use the fn+f4 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. You can keep a battery in the device or in storage, depending on how you work. Keeping the battery in the device whenever the device is plugged into AC power charges the battery and also protects your work in case of a power outage. However, a battery in the device slowly discharges when the device is off and unplugged from external power. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the device, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. Device battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the device, display brightness, external devices connected to the device, and other factors. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using battery power 13 Displaying the remaining battery charge Double-click the Power Meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options > Power Meter tab. Most charge indicators report battery status as both a percentage and as the number of minutes of charge remaining:
The percentage indicates the approximate amount of charge remaining in the battery. The time indicates the approximate running time remaining on the battery if the battery continues to provide power at the current level. For example, the time remaining will decrease when a DVD is playing and will increase when a DVD stops playing. When a battery is charging, a lightning bolt icon may be superimposed over the battery icon on the Power Meter screen. Inserting or removing the battery CAUTION: Removing a battery that is the sole power source may cause loss of information. To prevent loss of information, save your work and initiate Hibernation or shut down the device through Windows before removing the battery. To insert the battery:
1. Disconnect all external devices. 2. 3. 4. If the device is connected to AC power, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Turn the device upside down on a flat surface. Align the tabs on the battery with the notches on the device, and then insert the battery into the battery bay. The battery release latches automatically lock the battery into place. 14 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
To remove the battery:
1. Disconnect all external devices. 2. 3. 4. If the device is connected to AC power, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Turn the device upside down on a flat surface. Slide the battery release latches (1) to release the battery, and then remove the battery (2). Charging a battery WARNING! Do not charge the device battery while you are onboard aircraft. The battery charges whenever the device is plugged into external power through an AC adapter, an optional power adapter, an optional docking device, or an optional expansion product. The battery charges whether the device is off or in use, but it charges faster when the device is off. Charging may take longer if a battery is new, has been unused for 2 weeks or more, or is much warmer or cooler than room temperature. To prolong battery life and optimize the accuracy of battery charge displays, follow these recommendations:
If the device is on while the battery is charging, the battery meter in the notification area If you are charging a new battery, charge it fully before turning on the device. Charge the battery until the battery light turns off. NOTE:
may show 100 percent charge before the battery is fully charged. Allow the battery to discharge below 5 percent of a full charge through normal use before charging it. If the battery has been unused for one month or more, calibrate the battery instead of simply charging it. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using battery power 15 The battery light displays charge status:
On: The battery is charging. Blinking: The battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: The battery is fully charged, in use, or not installed. Maximizing battery discharge time Battery discharge time varies depending on the features you use while on battery power. Maximum discharge time gradually shortens, as the battery storage capacity naturally degrades. Tips for maximizing battery discharge time:
Lower the brightness on the display. Remove the battery from the device when it is not being used or charged. Store the battery in a cool, dry location. Managing low battery levels The information in this section describes the alerts and system responses set at the factory. Some low-
battery alerts and system responses can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. Preferences set using Power Options do not affect lights. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the device reaches a low battery level, the battery light blinks. If a low battery level is not resolved, the device enters a critical battery level, and the battery light blinks rapidly. The device takes the following actions for a critical battery level:
If Hibernation is enabled and the device is on or in Standby, the device initiates Hibernation. If Hibernation is disabled and the device is on or in Standby, the device remains briefly in Standby, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. 16 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Resolving a low battery level CAUTION: To reduce the risk of losing information when the device reaches a critical battery level and has initiated Hibernation, do not restore power until the power lights turn off. Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following devices:
AC adapter Optional expansion product or docking device Optional power adapter Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available Turn off the device or initiate Hibernation. 1. 2. Remove the discharged battery, and then insert a charged battery. 3. Turn on the device. Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Initiate Hibernation. or Save your work and shut down the device. Resolving a low battery level when the device cannot exit Hibernation When the device lacks sufficient power to exit Hibernation, follow these steps:
1. 2. Insert a charged battery or plug the device into external power. Exit Hibernation by briefly sliding the power switch. Calibrating a battery Calibrate a battery under the following conditions:
When battery charge displays seem inaccurate When you observe a significant change in battery run time Even if a battery is heavily used, it should not need to be calibrated more than once a month. It is also not necessary to calibrate a new battery. Step 1: Fully charge the battery WARNING! Do not charge the device battery while you are onboard aircraft. NOTE: The battery charges whether the device is off or in use, but it charges faster when the device is off. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using battery power 17 To fully charge the battery:
1. 2. Connect the device to an AC adapter, optional power adapter, optional expansion product, or Insert the battery into the device. optional docking device, and then plug the adapter or device into external power. The battery light on the device turns on. Leave the device plugged into external power until the battery is fully charged. The battery light on the device turns off. 3. Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Standby 1. Right-click the Power Meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Adjust Power Properties. or Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. 2. Record the 4 settings listed in the Running on batteries column and the Plugged in column so that you can reset them after the calibration. Set the 4 options to Never. 3. 4. Click OK. Step 3: Discharge the battery The device must remain on while the battery is being discharged. The battery can discharge whether or not you are using the device, but the battery will discharge faster while you are using it. If you plan to leave the device unattended during the discharge, save your information before beginning the discharge procedure. If you use the device occasionally during the discharge procedure and have set energy-saving timeouts, expect the following performance from the system during the discharge process:
The monitor will not turn off automatically. Hard drive speed will not decrease automatically when the device is idle. System-initiated Hibernation will not occur. To discharge a battery:
1. Unplug the device from its external power source, but do not turn off the device. 2. Run the device on battery power until the battery is discharged. The battery light begins to blink when the battery has discharged to a low battery level. When the battery is discharged, the battery light turns off and the device shuts down. 18 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Step 4: Fully recharge the battery To recharge the battery:
1. Plug the device into external power and maintain external power until the battery is fully recharged. When the battery is recharged, the battery light on the device turns off. You can use the device while the battery is recharging, but the battery will charge faster if the device is off. If the device is off, turn it on when the battery is fully charged and the battery light has turned off. 2. Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Standby CAUTION: Failure to reenable Hibernation after calibration may result in a full battery discharge and information loss if the device reaches a critical battery level. 1. 2. Reenter the settings that you recorded for the items in the Plugged in column and the Running Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. on batteries column. 3. Click OK. Conserving battery power Select low power-use settings through Power Options in Windows Control Panel. Turn off wireless and local area network (LAN) connections and exit modem applications when you are not using them. Disconnect external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, when you are not using them. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Use the fn+f3 and fn+f4 hotkeys to adjust screen brightness as needed. If you leave your work, initiate Standby or Hibernation, or shut down the device. Storing a battery CAUTION: To prevent damage to a battery, do not expose it to high temperatures for extended periods of time. If a device will be unused and unplugged from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. To prolong the charge of a stored battery, place it in a cool, dry place. NOTE: A stored battery should be checked every 6 months. If the capacity is less than 50 percent, recharge the battery before returning it to storage. Calibrate a battery before using it if it has been stored for one month or more. Disposing of a used battery WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. Refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices for battery disposal information. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using battery power 19 Shutting down the device CAUTION: Unsaved information will be lost when the device is shut down. The Shut Down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and device. Shut down the device under any of the following conditions:
When you need to replace the battery or access components inside the device When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB port When the device will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period To shut down the device, follow these steps:
NOTE:
shutdown is possible. 1. 2. If the device is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:
Save your work and close all open programs. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. If the device is in Standby or in Hibernation, you must first exit Standby or Hibernation before Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, click Shut Down > Turn Off. Slide and hold the power switch for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the device from external power and remove the battery. 20 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
3 Internet Your device supports the following types of Internet access:
WiredYou can access the Internet by connecting to a broadband network using the RJ-45
(network) jack. WirelessFor mobile Internet access, you can use a wireless connection. To learn about setting up a wireless network or adding your device to an existing network, refer to the Connecting to a wireless network section. Connecting to a wired network Connecting to a local area network (LAN) requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 network cable (purchased separately). If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (1), which prevents interference from TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable (2) toward the device. To connect the network cable:
WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a modem cable or telephone cable into an RJ-45 (network) jack. 1. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the device. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Connecting to a wired network 21 2. Plug the other end of the cable into a network wall jack (2). Connecting to a wireless network Using wireless devices Wireless technology transfers data across radio waves instead of wires. Your device may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:
Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the device to wireless local area networks
(commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, each mobile wireless device communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband Module (select models only)A wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that provides access to information wherever mobile network operator service is available. In a WWAN, each mobile device communicates to a mobile network operators base station. Mobile network operators install networks of base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. The device supports the following IEEE industry standards:
802.11b, the first popular standard, supports data rates of up to 11 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. 802.11g supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. An 802.11g WLAN device is backward compatible with 802.11b devices, so they can operate on the same network. For more information on wireless technology, refer to the information and Web site links provided in Help and Support. Identifying wireless and network status icons Icon Name Description 22 Chapter 3 Internet Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Wireless (connected) Identifies the location of the wireless light and the wireless switch on the device. Also identifies that one or more of the wireless devices are on. Wireless (disconnected) Indicates that all of the wireless devices are off. Wireless network connection (connected) Indicates that one or more of your WLAN devices are connected to the network. Wireless network connection (disconnected) Indicates that one or more of your WLAN devices are not connected to a network. Network status (connected) Indicates that one or more of your LAN drivers are installed and one or more LAN devices are connected to the network. Network status (disconnected) Indicates that one or more of your LAN drivers are installed but no LAN devices are connected to the network. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your device using these features:
Wireless switch Operating system controls Using the wireless switch The device has a wireless switch, one or more wireless devices, and one wireless light. All of the wireless devices on your device are enabled at the factory, so the wireless light is on (blue) when you turn on the device. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. If the wireless light is blue, at least one wireless device is on. If the wireless light is amber, all wireless devices are off. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless switch to turn on or turn off all of the wireless devices simultaneously. Using HP Connection Manager software (select models only) Connection Manager allows you to manage your Internet profiles, SMS (Short Message Service) messaging, connection devices and methods, and edit additional settings. To start Connection Manager:
1. Click the HP Connection Manager icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 2. Click Connect to turn on the wireless wide area network (WWAN) feature and use HP Mobile Broadband. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Connecting to a wireless network 23 NOTE: Connection time varies. After the connection is established, a notification message is displayed in the Connection Manager window. NOTE: Connection Manager is minimized when first opened. To maximize the Connection Manager window and view more information on connectivity status, click Details. For more details about using Connection Manager, refer to the Connection Manager Help. Using HP Wireless Assistant software A wireless device can be turned on or off using the Wireless Assistant software. If a wireless device is disabled by the Setup Utility, it must be reenabled by the Setup Utility before it can be turned on or off using Wireless Assistant. NOTE: Enabling or turning on a wireless device does not automatically connect the device to a network. To view the state of the wireless devices, position the mouse pointer over the wireless icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the wireless icon, click the Show hidden icons icon (< or <<) in the notification area. If the wireless icon is not displayed in the notification area, complete the following steps to change Wireless Assistant properties:
1. Click Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections > HP Wireless Assistant. 2. Click Properties. 3. 4. Click Apply. For more information, refer to the Wireless Assistant software Help:
1. Open Wireless Assistant by double-clicking the icon in the notification area. 2. Click the Help button. You can use the properties dialog box in Wireless Assistant to show the on/off controls for each installed wireless device and control the devices separately. To show the on/off controls:
1. Double-click the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 2. Click Properties. 3. Select the Independent controls for installed wireless devices check box, and then click Apply. Select the check box next to Wireless Assistant icon in notification area. 4. Click Turn off or Turn on to control each wireless device separately. Using a WLAN With a WLAN device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other devices and accessories that are linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. 24 Chapter 3 Internet Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
NOTE: The terms wireless router and wireless access point are often used interchangeably. A large-scale WLAN, such as a corporate or public WLAN, typically uses wireless access points that can accommodate a large number of devices and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which allows several wireless and wired devices to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without requiring additional pieces of hardware or software. To use the WLAN device in your device, you must connect to a WLAN infrastructure (provided through a service provider or a public or corporate network). Setting up a WLAN To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:
A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider (ISP) A wireless router (purchased separately) (2) The wireless device (3) The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. As your network grows, additional wireless and wired devices can be connected to the network to access the Internet. For help in setting up your WLAN, refer to the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Protecting your WLAN It is essential to understand that because the WLAN standard was designed with only limited security capabilitiesbasically to foil casual eavesdropping rather than more powerful forms of attackWLANs are vulnerable to well-known and well-documented security weaknesses. WLANs in public areas, or hotspots, like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. New technologies are being developed by wireless manufacturers and hotspot service providers that make the public environment more secure and anonymous. If you are concerned about the security of your device in a hotspot, limit your network activities to noncritical e-mail and basic Internet surfing. When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. The common security levels are Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)-
Personal and Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). Because wireless radio signals travel outside the network, other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals and either connect to your network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Connecting to a wireless network 25
(uninvited) or capture information being sent across it. However, you can take precautions to protect your WLAN:
Use a wireless transmitter with built-in security Many wireless base stations, gateways, or routers provide built-in security features such as wireless security protocols and firewalls. With the correct wireless transmitter, you can protect your network from the most common wireless security risks. Work behind a firewall A firewall is a barrier that checks both data and requests for data that are sent to your network, and discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in many varieties, both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types. Use wireless encryption A variety of sophisticated encryption protocols is available for your WLAN. Find the solution that works best for your network security:
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a wireless security protocol that encodes or encrypts all network data before it is transmitted using a WEP key. Usually, you can allow the network to assign the WEP key. Alternatively, you can set up your own key, generate a different key, or choose other advanced options. Without the correct key, others will not be able to use the WLAN. WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access), like WEP, uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt data that is transmitted over the network. However, instead of using one static security key for encryptions as WEP does, WPA uses temporal key integrity protocol (TKIP) to dynamically generate a new key for every packet. It also generates different sets of keys for each device on the network. Close your network If possible, prevent your network name (SSID) from being broadcast by the wireless transmitter. Most networks initially broadcast the name, telling any device nearby that your network is available. By closing the network, other devices are less likely to know that your network exists. NOTE:
the SSID to connect new devices to the network. Write down the SSID and store it in a secure place before closing the network. If your network is closed and the SSID is not broadcast, you will need to know or remember Connecting to a WLAN To connect to the WLAN, follow these steps:
1. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. If it is on, the wireless light is blue. If the wireless light is amber, slide the wireless switch. Select Start > Connect to. Select your WLAN from the list, and then type the network security key, if required. 2. 3. If the network is unsecured, meaning that anyone can access the network, a warning is displayed. Click Connect Anyway to accept the warning and complete the connection. If the network is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a network security key, which is a security code. Type the code, and then click Connect to complete the connection. NOTE:
If no WLANs are listed, you are out of range of a wireless router or access point. 26 Chapter 3 Internet Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
If you do not see the network you want to connect to, click Set up a connection or NOTE:
network. A list of options is displayed. You can choose to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the wireless network connection icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name, speed, strength, and status of the connection. 4. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. More information about using a WLAN is available through the following resources:
Information from your ISP and the user guides included with your wireless router and other WLAN equipment Information and Web site links provided in Help and Support For a list of public WLANs near you, contact your ISP or search the Web. Web sites that list public WLANs include Cisco Internet Mobile Office Wireless Locations, Hotspotlist, and Geektools. Check with each public WLAN location for cost and connection requirements. Roaming to another network When you move your device within range of another WLAN, Windows attempts to connect to that network. If the attempt is successful, your device is automatically connected to the new network. If Windows does not recognize the new network, follow the same procedure you used initially to connect to your WLAN. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) An HP Mobile Broadband Module is a wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that provides access to information wherever mobile network operator service is available. Using HP Mobile Broadband requires a network service provider (called a mobile network operator), which in most cases is a mobile phone network operator. Coverage for HP Mobile Broadband is similar to mobile phone voice coverage. When used with mobile network operator service, HP Mobile Broadband gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road or outside the range of Wi-Fi hotspots. HP Mobile Broadband supports the following technologies:
HSPA (High Speed Packet Access) module, which provides access to networks based on the Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) telecommunications standard. EV-DO (Evolution Data Optimized), which provides access to networks based on the code division multiple access (CDMA) telecommunications standard. You may need the HP Mobile Broadband Module serial number to activate mobile broadband service. The serial number is printed on a label inside the battery bay of your device. Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM). A SIM contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some devices include a SIM that is preinstalled in the battery bay. If the SIM is not preinstalled, it may be provided in the packet of HP Mobile Broadband information provided with your device, or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the device. For information on inserting and removing the SIM, refer to the Inserting a SIM and Removing a SIM sections in this chapter. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) 27 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
For information on HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, refer to the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your device. For additional information, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/mobilebroadband (US only). Inserting a SIM CAUTION: To prevent damage to the connectors, use minimal force when inserting a SIM. To insert a SIM:
1. Shut down the device. If you are not sure whether the device is off or in Hibernation, turn the device on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the device through the operating system. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the device. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. 6. Remove the battery. 7. Turn the device upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. Insert the SIM into the SIM slot, and gently push the SIM into the slot until it is firmly seated. 8. Replace the battery. NOTE: HP Mobile Broadband will be disabled if the battery is not replaced. 9. Reconnect external power. 10. Reconnect external devices. 11. Turn on the device. 28 Chapter 3 Internet Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Removing a SIM To remove a SIM:
1. Shut down the device. If you are not sure whether the device is off or in Hibernation, turn the device on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the device through the operating system. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the device. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. 6. Remove the battery. 7. Press in on the SIM (1), and then remove it from the slot (2). Turn the device upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 8. Replace the battery. 9. Reconnect external power. 10. Reconnect external devices. 11. Turn on the device. Using the HP Mobile Broadband Setup Utility (select models only) The HP Mobile Broadband Setup Utility provides basic information about setting up HP Mobile Broadband. NOTE: The HP Mobile Broadband Setup Utility is not available in all regions. When you first turn on HP Mobile Broadband, the Getting Started with HP Mobile Broadband page opens. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using the HP Mobile Broadband Setup Utility (select models only) 29 4 Multimedia Multimedia features Your device includes multimedia features that allow you to listen to music, watch movies, and view pictures. Your device may include the following multimedia components:
Integrated speakers for listening to music Integrated webcam that allows you to capture photographs and videos Preinstalled multimedia software that allows you to play and manage your music, movies, and pictures NOTE: Your device may not include all of the components listed. The following sections explain how to identify and use the multimedia components included with your device. Identifying your multimedia components The following illustration and table describe the multimedia features of the device. 30 Chapter 4 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Component Description
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8) Webcam Captures still photographs and videos. NOTE: To capture videos, you will need to install additional webcam software. Webcam light Internal microphone Speakers (2) Volume up hotkey Volume down hotkey Volume mute hotkey Audio-out (headphones) jack/Audio-in
(microphone) jack On: The webcam is in use. Records sound. Produce sound. Increases speaker sound when pressed in combination with the fn key. Decreases speaker sound when pressed in combination with the fn key. Mutes speaker sound when pressed in combination with the fn key. Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or television audio. Also connects an optional headset microphone. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the device speakers are disabled. Adjusting the volume You can adjust the volume using the following controls:
Device volume hotkeyA combination of the fn key (1) and either the f8 (2), f10 (3), or f11 (4) function key:
To mute or restore volume, press fn+f8. To decrease volume, press fn+f10. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Multimedia features 31 To increase volume, press fn+f11. Windows volume control:
a. Click the Volume icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. b. Increase or decrease the volume by moving the slider up or down. Select the Mute check box to mute the volume. or a. Double-click the Volume icon in the notification area. b. In the Volume Control column, you can increase or decrease the volume by moving the Volume slider up or down. You can also adjust the balance or mute the volume. If the Volume icon is not displayed in the notification area, follow these steps to add it:
a. Select Start > Control Panel > Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices > Sounds and Audio Devices > Volume tab. b. Select the Place volume icon in the taskbar check box. c. Click Apply. Program volume control:
Volume can also be adjusted within some programs. Multimedia software Your device includes preinstalled multimedia software that allows you to play music, watch movies, and view pictures. 32 Chapter 4 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using other preinstalled multimedia software To locate other preinstalled multimedia software:
Select Start > All Programs, and then open the multimedia program you want to use. For example, if you want to use Windows Media Player (select models only), click Windows Media Player. NOTE: Some programs may be located in subfolders. Installing multimedia software from the Internet To install multimedia software from the Internet, go to the software manufacturers Web site and follow the instructions. NOTE: Software downloaded from the Internet may contain viruses. Refer to the Security chapter for more information. Audio Your device has a variety of audio features that allow you to:
Play music using your device speakers and/or connected external speakers. Record sound using the internal microphone or an optional external headset microphone. Download music from the Internet. Create multimedia presentations using audio and images. Transmit sound and images with instant messaging programs. Connecting external audio devices WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To connect external devices such as external speakers, headphones, or a headset microphone, refer to the information provided with the device. For best results, remember the following tips:
Be sure that the device cable has 4conductor connector that supports both audio-out
(headphones) and audio-in (microphone). Be sure that the device cable is securely connected to the jack on your device. Be sure to install any drivers required by the external device. NOTE: A driver is a required program that acts like a translator between the device and the programs that use the device. Checking your audio functions To check the system sound on your device, follow these steps:
1. Select Start > Control Panel > Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices > Sounds and Audio Devices. 2. When the Sound and Audio Device Properties window opens, click the Sounds tab. Under Program events, select any sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and click the arrow button to check the sound. Audio 33 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. To check the record functions of the device, follow these steps:
1. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Entertainment > Sound Recorder. 2. Click the record button and speak into the microphone. Save the file to your desktop. 3. Open a multimedia program and play back the sound. NOTE: For best results when recording, speak directly into the microphone and record sound in a setting free of background noise. To confirm or change the audio settings on your device, right-click the Volume icon on the taskbar, or select Start > Control Panel > Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices > Sounds and Audio Devices. Video Your device enables you to use a variety of video features:
Watch movies Play games over the Internet Edit pictures and video to create presentations Connect external video devices Connecting an external monitor or projector Use a VGA cable (purchased separately) to connect an external display, such as a monitor or projector, to the external monitor port on the device. To connect an external monitor or projector:
1. Connect the optional VGA cable to the external monitor port on the device. 2. Connect the external monitor or projector to the other end of the cable. NOTE:
fn+f2 to transfer the image to the external display. Repeatedly pressing fn+f2 alternates the screen image between the external display and the device. If a properly connected external monitor or projector does not display a screen image, press 34 Chapter 4 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Webcam Your device includes an integrated webcam, located at the top of the display. The webcam is an input device that allows you to capture still photographs and videos. NOTE: To record videos, you need to install additional webcam software. To access the webcam:
1. Click Start > My Computer, and then double-click the camera icon. 2. Click Take a new picture to take a picture. NOTE: The picture is automatically saved in the My Documents folder. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Webcam 35 5 Security Protecting the device Standard security features provided by the Windows operating system and the non-Windows Setup Utility can protect your personal settings and data from a variety of risks. Follow the procedures in this chapter to use the following features:
Passwords Firewall software Antivirus support (Norton Internet Security) Critical security updates NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents, but they may not deter software attacks or prevent the device from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: Before you send your device for service, remove all password settings. Device risk Unauthorized use of the device Unauthorized access to data Unauthorized access to Setup Utility, BIOS settings, and other system identification information Security feature QuickLock Power-on password Firewall software Windows updates Administrator password Ongoing or future threats to the device Critical security updates from Microsoft Unauthorized access to a Windows user account User password Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your device information. Several types of passwords can be set, depending on how you want to control access to your information. Passwords can be set in Windows or in the non-Windows Setup Utility preinstalled on the device. CAUTION: To prevent being locked out of the device, record each password you set. Because most passwords are not displayed as they are set, changed, or deleted, it is essential to record each password immediately and store it in a secure place. You can use the same password for a Setup Utility feature and for a Windows security feature. You can also use the same password for more than one Setup Utility feature. 36 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Use the following guidelines when setting a password in Setup Utility:
A password can be any combination of up to 8 letters and numbers and is case sensitive. A password set in the Setup Utility must be entered at a Setup Utility prompt. A password set in Windows must be entered at a Windows prompt. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:
When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Write down your passwords and store them in a secure place away from the device. Do not store passwords in a file on the device. Do not use your name or other personal information that could be easily discovered by an outsider. The following sections list Windows and Setup Utility passwords and describe their functions. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords, select Start > Help and Support. Passwords set in Windows Password Administrator password User password QuickLock Passwords set in Setup Utility Password Administrator password*
Function Protects administrator-level access to device contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility contents. Protects access to a Windows user account. It also protects access to the device contents and must be entered when you exit Standby or Hibernation. Protects the device by requiring a password to be entered in the Windows Log On dialog box before you access the device. After you set a user or administrator password, follow these steps:
1. 2. Initiate QuickLock by pressing fn+f6. Exit QuickLock by entering your Windows user or administrator password. Function Protects access to Setup Utility. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you access Setup Utility. CAUTION:
cannot access Setup Utility. If you forget your administrator password, you Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using passwords 37 Password Power-on password*
Function Protects access to the device contents. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you turn on or restart the device, or exit Hibernation. CAUTION:
If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the device, or exit Hibernation.
*For details about each of these passwords, refer to the following topics. Administrator password Your administrator password protects the configuration settings and system identification information in Setup Utility. After this password is set, you must enter it each time you access Setup Utility. Your administrator password is not interchangeable with an administrator password set in Windows, nor is it displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. Be sure that you record your password and store it in a safe place. Managing an administrator password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:
1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10
= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Set Administrator Password, and then press enter. To set an administrator password, type your password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To change an administrator password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, type a new password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To delete an administrator password, type your current password in the Enter Password field, and then press enter 4 times. 3. To save your changes and exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes. Your changes go into effect when the device restarts. Entering an administrator password At the Enter Password prompt, type your administrator password, and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the administrator password, you must restart the device and try again. Power-on password Your power-on password prevents unauthorized use of the device. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you turn on or restart the device, or exit Hibernation. A power-on password is not displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. 38 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Managing a power-on password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:
1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10
= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Set Power-On Password, and then press enter. To set a power-on password, type your password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To change a power-on password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, type a new password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To delete a power-on password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, and then press enter 4 times. 3. To save your changes and exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes. Your changes go into effect when the device restarts. Entering a power-on password At the Enter Password prompt, type your password, and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the password, you must restart the device and try again. Using antivirus software When you use the device for e-mail or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Norton Internet Security, an antivirus program, is preinstalled on the device. Your version of Norton Internet Security includes 60 days of free updates. It is strongly recommended that you protect the device against new viruses beyond 60 days by purchasing extended update service. Instructions for using and updating Norton Internet Security software and for purchasing extended update service are provided within the program. To access Norton Internet Security, or to get more information about it, click Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security. NOTE: HP recommends that always update the antivirus software to help protect your device. NOTE: For more information about computer viruses, type viruses in the Search box in Help and Support. Using firewall software When you use the device for e-mail, network, or Internet access, unauthorized persons may be able to gain access to the device, your personal files, and information about you. Use the firewall software preinstalled on the device to protect your privacy. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using antivirus software 39 Firewall features include logging and reporting of network activity, and automatic monitoring of all incoming and outgoing traffic. Refer to the firewall user guide or contact your firewall manufacturer for more information. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to Internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized e-mail attachments. To temporarily resolve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. Installing critical updates CAUTION: Microsoft sends alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the device from security breaches and device viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. Updates to the operating system and other software may have become available after the device was shipped. To be sure that all available updates are installed on the device, observe these guidelines:
Run Windows Update as soon as possible after you set up your device. Use the update link at Start > All Programs > Windows Update. Run Windows Update at regular intervals, such as once a month. Obtain updates to Windows and other Microsoft programs, as they are released, from the Microsoft Web site and through the updates link in Help and Support. 40 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
6 Digital cards Optional digital cards provide secure data storage and convenient data sharing. These cards are often used with digital mediaequipped cameras and PDAs as well as with other devices. The Digital Media Slot supports the following formats:
Memory Stick (MS) MS/Pro MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card xD-Picture card Inserting a digital card CAUTION: To avoid damaging the digital card or the device, do not insert any type of adapter into the Digital Media Slot. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the digital card connectors, use minimal force to insert a digital card. 1. Hold the digital card label-side up, with the connectors facing the device. 2. Insert the card into the Digital Media Slot, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected, and a menu of options may be displayed. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Inserting a digital card 41 Stopping and removing a digital card CAUTION: To prevent loss of data or an unresponsive system, stop a digital card before removing it. 1. Save your information and close all programs associated with the digital card. NOTE: To stop a data transfer, click Cancel in the operating system Copying window. 2. 3. Stop the digital card:
a. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, click the Show Hidden Icons icon
(< or <<) in the notification area. b. Click the name of the digital card in the list. c. Click Stop, and then click OK. Press in on the digital card (1), and then remove the card from the slot (2). 42 Chapter 6 Digital cards Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
7 USB devices Using a USB device Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a hardware interface that can be used to connect an optional external device, such as a USB keyboard, mouse, drive, printer, scanner, or hub. Devices can be connected to the system, an optional docking device, or an optional expansion product. Some USB devices may require additional support software, which is usually included with the device. For more information about device-specific software, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. The device has 3 USB ports, which support USB 1.0, USB 1.1, and USB 2.0 devices. An optional USB hub, optional docking device, or an optional expansion product provides additional USB ports that can be used with the device. Connecting a USB device CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, use minimal force to connect a USB device. To connect a USB device, connect the USB cable for the device to the USB port. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected. NOTE: When you connect a USB device, you may see a message in the notification area to let you know that the device is recognized by the system. Stopping and removing a USB device CAUTION: To prevent loss of information or an unresponsive system, stop a USB device before removing it. CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, do not pull on the cable to remove the USB device. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using a USB device 43 To stop and remove a USB device:
1. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, click the Show Hidden Icons icon (< or
<<) in the notification area. 2. Click the name of the device in the list. NOTE:
If the USB device is not listed, you do not have to stop the device before you remove it. 3. Click Stop, and then click OK. 4. Remove the device. 44 Chapter 7 USB devices Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
8 Pointing devices and keyboard Setting pointing device preferences Use Mouse Properties in Windows to customize settings for pointing devices, such as button configuration, click speed, and pointer options. To access Mouse Properties, select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware >
Mouse. Using pointing devices Using the TouchPad To move the pointer, slide your finger across the TouchPad surface in the direction you want the pointer to go. Use the TouchPad buttons like the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To scroll up and down using the TouchPad vertical scroll zone, slide your finger up or down over the lines. NOTE:
If you are using the TouchPad to move the pointer, you must lift your finger off the TouchPad before moving it to the scroll zone. Simply sliding your finger from the TouchPad to the scroll zone will not activate the scrolling function. Connecting an external mouse You can connect an external USB mouse to the device using one of the USB ports on the device. Using the keyboard Using hotkeys Hotkeys are combinations of the fn key (1) and one of the function keys (2). The icons on the f1 through f4, and f6, f8, f10, and f11 keys represent the hotkey functions. Hotkey functions and procedures are discussed in the following sections. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Setting pointing device preferences 45 Function Initiate Standby. Switch the image. Decrease screen brightness. Increase screen brightness. Initiate QuickLock. Mute or restore speaker. Decrease speaker sound. Increase speaker sound. Hotkey fn+f1 fn+f2 fn+f3 fn+f4 fn+f6 fn+f8 fn+f10 fn+f11 To use a hotkey command on the device keyboard, follow either of these steps:
Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the hotkey command. or Press and hold down the fn key, briefly press the second key of the hotkey command, and then release both keys at the same time. Initiating Standby (fn+f1) Press fn+f1 to initiate Standby. When Standby is initiated, your information is stored in memory, the screen is cleared, and power is conserved. While the device is in Standby, the power light blinks. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of information loss, save your work before initiating Standby. The device must be on before you can initiate Standby. 46 Chapter 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
NOTE:
If a critical battery level occurs while the device is in Standby, the device initiates Hibernation and the information stored in memory is saved to the hard drive. The factory setting for critical battery action is Hibernate, but this setting can be changed in advanced power settings. To exit Standby, briefly slide the power switch. The function of the fn+f1 hotkey can be changed. For example, you can set the fn+f1 hotkey to initiate Hibernation instead of Standby. NOTE:
hotkey. In all Windows operating system windows, references to the sleep button apply to the fn+f1 Switching the screen image (fn+f2) Press fn+f2 to switch the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the device, pressing fn+f2 alternates the screen image from device display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the device and the monitor. NOTE: You must use a VGA cable (purchased separately) to connect an external display, such as a monitor or projector, to the external monitor port on the device. Most external monitors receive video information from the device using the external VGA video standard. The fn+f2 hotkey can also alternate images among other devices receiving video information from the device. The following video transmission types, with examples of devices that use them, are supported by the fn+f2 hotkey:
LCD (device display) External VGA (most external monitors) Decreasing screen brightness (fn+f3) Press fn+f3 to decrease screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to decrease the brightness level incrementally. Increasing screen brightness (fn+f4) Press fn+f4 to increase screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to increase the brightness level incrementally. Initiating QuickLock (fn+f6) Press fn+f6 to initiate the QuickLock security feature. QuickLock protects your information by displaying the operating system Log On window. While the Log On window is displayed, the device cannot be accessed until a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password is entered. NOTE: Before you can use QuickLock, you must set a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password. For instructions, refer to Help and Support. To use QuickLock, press fn+f6 to display the Log On window and lock the device. Then follow the instructions on the screen to enter your Windows user password or your Windows administrator password and access the device. Muting speaker sound (fn+f8) Press fn+f8 to mute speaker sound. Press the hotkey again to restore speaker sound. Using the keyboard 47 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Decreasing speaker sound (fn+f10) Press fn+f10 to decrease speaker sound. Hold down the hotkey to decrease speaker sound incrementally. Increasing speaker sound (fn+f11) Press fn+f11 to increase speaker sound. Hold down the hotkey to increase speaker sound incrementally. 48 Chapter 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
9 Drives Identifying installed drives To view the drives installed on the device, select Start > My Computer. Handling drives Drives are fragile device components that must be handled with care. Refer to the following cautions before handling drives. Additional cautions are included with the procedures to which they apply. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the device, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:
Before you move a device that is connected to an external hard drive, initiate Standby and allow the screen to clear, or properly disconnect the external hard drive. Before handling a drive, discharge static electricity by touching the unpainted metal surface of the drive. Do not touch the connector pins on a removable drive or on the device. Handle a drive carefully; do not drop a drive or place items on it. Before removing or inserting a drive, shut down the device. If you are unsure whether the device is off, in Standby, or in Hibernation, turn the device on and then shut it down through the operating system. Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive into a drive bay. Do not type on the keyboard or move the device while an optional optical drive is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to vibration. When the battery is the only source of power, be sure that the battery is sufficiently charged before writing to media. Avoid exposing a drive to temperature or humidity extremes. Avoid exposing a drive to liquids. Do not spray the drive with cleaning products. Remove media from a drive before removing the drive from the drive bay, or traveling with, shipping, or storing a drive. If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-
through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, such as conveyor belts, use X-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a drive. Using external drives Removable external drives expand your options for storing and accessing information. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Identifying installed drives 49 USB drives include the following types:
1.44-megabyte diskette drive Hard drive module (a hard drive with an adapter attached) DVD-ROM Drive DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive DVD+RW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive DVDRW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive Using optional external devices NOTE: For more information about required software and drivers, or to learn which device port to use, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. To connect an external device:
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the equipment when connecting a powered device, be sure that the device is turned off and the AC power cord is unplugged. 1. Connect the device. 2. 3. To disconnect an unpowered external device, turn off the device, and then disconnect it. To disconnect a powered external device, turn off the device, disconnect it, and then unplug the AC power cord. If you are connecting a powered device, plug the device power cord into a grounded AC outlet. Turn on the device. 50 Chapter 9 Drives Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
10 Memory modules The device has one memory module compartment, which is located on the bottom of the device. The memory capacity of the device can be upgraded by replacing the existing memory module in the primary memory module slot. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock and damage to the equipment, unplug the power cord and remove all batteries before installing a memory module. CAUTION: Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage electronic components. Before beginning any procedure, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. To add or replace a memory module:
1. 2. Save your work. Shut down the device and close the display. If you are not sure whether the device is off or in Hibernation, turn the device on by sliding the power switch. Then shut down the device through the operating system. Turn the device upside down on a flat surface. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the device. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. 6. Remove the battery from the device. 7. Using a small Phillips screwdriver, loosen the 2 cover screws (1). 8. Lift the memory module compartment cover (2) away from the device. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
51 9. Remove the existing memory module:
a. Pull away the retention clips (1) on each side of the memory module. The memory module tilts up. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module. b. Grasp the edge of the memory module (2), and gently pull the module out of the memory module slot. To protect a memory module after removal, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 10. Insert a new memory module:
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module, and do not bend the memory module. a. b. With the memory module at a 45-degree angle from the surface of the memory module Align the notched edge (1) of the memory module with the tab in the memory module slot. compartment, press the module (2) into the memory module slot until it is seated. 52 Chapter 10 Memory modules Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
c. Gently press the memory module (3) down, applying pressure to both the left and right edges of the memory module, until the retention clips snap into place. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, be sure that you do not bend the memory module. 11. Align the tabs on the memory module compartment cover with the notches on the device, and then close the cover (1). 12. Tighten the 2 cover screws (2). 13. Replace the battery. 14. Turn the device right-side up, and then reconnect external power and external devices. 15. Turn on the device. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
53 11 Updating software Updated versions of the software provided with your device may be available on the HP Web site. Most software and BIOS updates on the HP Web site are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. To update the software, follow these steps, which are explained in the remainder of this guide:
1. Identify your device model, product category, and series or family. Prepare for a system BIOS update by identifying the BIOS version currently installed on the device. If your device is connected to a network, consult the network administrator before installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. NOTE: The device system BIOS is stored on the system ROM. The BIOS initializes the operating system, determines how the device will interact with the hardware devices, and provides for data transfer among hardware devices, including the time and date. Access the updates on the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com. Install the updates. Updating the BIOS 2. 3. To update the BIOS, first determine what BIOS version you currently have and then download and install the new BIOS. Determining the BIOS version To determine whether available BIOS updates contain later BIOS versions than those currently installed on the device, you need to know the version of the system BIOS currently installed. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be displayed by opening the Setup Utility. To display the BIOS information:
1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10
= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. If the Setup Utility does not open with the system information displayed, use the arrow keys to select the Main menu. When the Main menu is selected, BIOS and other system information is displayed. To exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. 2. 3. 54 Chapter 11 Updating software Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To prevent damage to the device or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the device is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the device is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:
Do not disconnect power from the device by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the device or initiate Standby or Hibernation. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. To download a BIOS update:
1. Access the page on the HP Web site that provides software for your device:
Select Start > Help and Support, and then select the software and drivers update. Follow the instructions on the screen to identify your device and access the BIOS update you want to download. At the download area, follow these steps:
a. Identify the BIOS update that is later than the BIOS version currently installed on your device. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the instructions on the screen to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update will be downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. 2. 3. b. NOTE:
any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If you connect your device to a network, consult the network administrator before installing BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed, follow these steps:
1. Open Windows Explorer by selecting Start > My Computer. 2. Double-click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the instructions on the screen. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Updating the BIOS 55 Updating programs and drivers To download and install software other than a BIOS update, follow these steps:
1. Access the page on the HP Web site that provides software for your device:
Select Start > Help and Support, and then select the software and drivers update. Follow the instructions on the screen to find the software you want to update. At the download area, select the software you want to download and follow the instructions on the screen. NOTE: Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the software will be downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the software. 2. 3. 4. When the download is complete, open Windows Explorer by selecting Start > My Computer. 5. Double-click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 6. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 7. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The installation begins. 8. Complete the installation by following the instructions on the screen. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. 56 Chapter 11 Updating software Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
12 Setup Utility Starting the Setup Utility The Setup Utility is a ROM-based information and customization utility that can be used even when your Windows operating system is not working. The utility reports information about the device and provides settings for startup, security, and other preferences. To start the Setup Utility:
Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10
= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. Using the Setup Utility Changing the language of the Setup Utility The following procedure explains how to change the language of the Setup Utility. If the Setup Utility is not already running, begin at step 1. If the Setup Utility is already running, begin at step 2. 1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10
= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select System Configuration > Language, and then press enter. 3. Use the arrow keys to select a language, and then press enter. 4. When a confirmation prompt with your language selected is displayed, press enter. 5. To save your change and exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. Your change goes into effect immediately. Navigating and selecting in the Setup Utility Because the Setup Utility is not Windows based, it does not support the TouchPad. Navigation and selection are by keystroke. To choose a menu or a menu item, use the arrow keys. To choose an item in a list or to toggle a field, for example an Enable/Disable field, use either the arrow keys or f5 or f6. To select an item, press enter. To close a text box or return to the menu display, press esc. To display additional navigation and selection information while the Setup Utility is open, press f1. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Starting the Setup Utility 57 Displaying system information The following procedure explains how to display system information in the Setup Utility. If the Setup Utility is not open, begin at step 1. If the Setup Utility is open, begin at step 2. 1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10 2. 3.
= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. Select the Main menu. System information such as the system time and date, and identification information about the device is displayed. To exit the Setup Utility without changing any settings, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. Restoring default settings in the Setup Utility The following procedure explains how to restore the Setup Utility default settings. If the Setup Utility is not already running, begin at step 1. If the Setup Utility is already running, begin at step 2. 1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10
= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Exit > Load Setup Defaults, and then press enter. 3. When the Setup Confirmation is displayed, press enter. 4. To save your change and exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. The Setup Utility default settings go into effect when the device restarts. NOTE: Your password, security, and language settings are not changed when you restore the factory default settings. Exiting the Setup Utility You can exit the Setup Utility with or without saving changes. To exit the Setup Utility and save your changes from the current session:
If the Setup Utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display. Then use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. To exit the Setup Utility without saving your changes from the current session:
If the Setup Utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display. Then use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. After either choice, the device restarts in Windows. Setup Utility menus The menu tables in this section provide an overview of Setup Utility options. NOTE: Some of the Setup Utility menu items listed in this chapter may not be supported by your device. 58 Chapter 12 Setup Utility Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Main menu Select System information Security menu Select Administrator password Power-On Password System Configuration menu To do this View and change the system time and date. View identification information about the device. View specification information about the processor, memory size, and system BIOS. To do this Enter, change, or delete an administrator password. Enter, change, or delete a power-on password. Select Language Support Processor C4 State Boot Options To do this Change the Setup Utility language. Enable/disable the processor C4 sleep state. Set the following boot options:
f10 and f12 Delay (sec.)Set the delay for the f10 and f12 functions of the Setup Utility in intervals of 5 seconds each (0, 5, 10, 15, 20). Internal Network Adapter bootEnable/disable boot from Internal Network Adapter. Boot OrderSet the boot order for:
Internal hard drive (select models only) USB Floppy USB CD/DVD ROM Drive USB flash drive USB Hard drive USB Card Reader Network adapter NOTE: Only the devices attached to the system will appear in the boot order menu. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Setup Utility menus 59 Diagnostics menu Select To do this Hard Disk Self Test (select models only) Run a comprehensive self-test on the hard drive. Memory Test Run a diagnostic test on the system memory. 60 Chapter 12 Setup Utility Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Index A AC adapter connecting 13 identifying 9 administrator password creating 38 entering 38 managing 38 airport security devices 49 antennas 8 applications key, Windows 3 audio devices, connecting external 33 audio functions, checking 33 audio-in (microphone) jack 5, 31 audio-out (headphones) jack 5, 31 B battery calibrating 17 charging 15, 17 conserving power 19 discharging 16 disposing 19 identifying 9 inserting 14 low battery levels 16 recharging 19 removing 14 storing 19 battery bay, identifying 7 battery light 4, 15, 16 battery power 13 battery release latches 7, 14 battery temperature 19 bay, battery 7 BIOS, updating 54 boot options 59 boot order 59 button, volume mute 31 buttons left TouchPad 1 right TouchPad 1 C cables LAN 21 USB 43 VGA 34 calibrating battery 17 caps lock light, identifying 2 CD drive 50 changing the Setup Utility language 57 charging batteries 15, 17 checking audio functions 33 compartments, memory module 7 components additional hardware 8 bottom 7 display 6 front 3 left-side 5 right-side 4 TouchPad 1 connecting to a WLAN 26 connection, external power 13 conservation, power 19 cord, power 9 corporate WLAN connection 26 critical battery level 16 D Diagnostics menu 60 digital card inserting 41 removing 42 stopping 42 Digital Media Slot, identifying 4 diskette drive 50 display image, switching 47 screen brightness hotkeys 47 display switch, identifying 6 displaying system information 58 drive light, identifying 3 drive media 10 drives diskette 50 external 49 hard 49 optical 50 drives, boot order 59 DVD drive 50 E earbuds 5, 31 encryption 26 entering a power-on password 39 entering an administrator password 38 exiting the Setup Utility 58 external audio devices, connecting 33 external drive 49 external monitor port 34 external monitor port, identifying 4 F firewall 26 fn key 3, 45 function keys 2, 45 H hard disk drive, external 49 hard drive self test 60 hard drive, external 49 hardware, identifying 1 headphones 5, 31 headphones (audio-out) jack 5, 31 Hibernation exiting 10 initiated during critical battery level 16 initiating 10 hotkeys decreasing screen brightness 47 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Index 61 decreasing speaker sound 48 description 45 increasing screen brightness 47 increasing speaker volume 48 initiating QuickLock 47 initiating Standby 46 muting speaker sound 47 switching screen image 47 using 46 HP Mobile Broadband Module 27 HP Mobile Broadband, disabled 28 hubs 43 I icons network status 22 wireless 22 internal display switch, identifying 6 internal microphone, identifying 6, 31 Internet connection setup 25 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 5, 31 audio-out (headphones) 5, 31 RJ-45 (network) 4 K keyboard hotkeys, identifying 45 keys fn 3 function 2 Windows applications 3 Windows logo 3 L labels Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 9 regulatory 9 service tag 9 language support 59 latches, battery release 7 left TouchPad button, identifying 1 lights battery 4 caps lock 2 drive 3 power 3 webcam 6 wireless 4 local area network (LAN) cable required 21 connecting cable 21 low battery level 16 M Main menu 59 managing a power-on password 39 managing an administrator password 38 memory module inserting 52 removing 52 cover removing 51 replacing 53 memory module compartment memory module compartment, identifying 7 memory test 60 microphone (audio-in) jack 5, 31 monitor, connecting 34 mouse, external connecting 45 setting preferences 45 multimedia components, identifying 30 multimedia software installing 33 using 33 mute button 31 mute hotkey, identifying 31 N navigating in the Setup Utility 57 network cable connecting 21 noise suppression circuitry 21 network jack, identifying 4 network status icon 22 noise suppression circuitry, network cable 21 62 Index Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
O operating system 20 optical drive 50 P passwords administrator 38 power-on 38 set in Setup Utility 37 set in Windows 37 external monitor 34 USB 4, 5, 43 ports power connecting 13 conserving 19 power connector, identifying 5 power cord, identifying 9 power light, identifying 3 power switch, identifying 3 power-on password creating 39 entering 39 managing 39 Processor C4 State 59 product name and number, device 9 programs, updating 56 projector, connecting 34 public WLAN connection 26 HP Mobile Broadband Module Q QuickLock 37 QuickLock hotkey 47 R readable media 10 regulatory information serial number 9 regulatory label 9 wireless 9 release latches battery 7, 15 restoring default settings 58 right TouchPad button, identifying 1 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 4 S screen brightness hotkeys 47 screen image, switching 47 security cable slot, identifying 5 Security menu 59 security, cable slot 5 security, wireless 25 selecting in the Setup Utility 57 serial number, device 9 service tag 9 setup of WLAN 25 Setup Utility, passwords set in 37 setup, device 1 shut down 20 SIM inserting 28 removing 29 software installing 33 multimedia 33 Windows Media Player 33 speakers, identifying 6, 31 Standby exiting 10 initiating 10 Standby hotkey 46 storing battery 19 switches power 3 wireless 4 System Configuration menu 59 system information 59 T temperature 19 TouchPad buttons 1 identifying 1 using 45 TouchPad scroll zone, identifying 1 traveling with the device 19 turning off the device 20 removing 43 stopping 43 USB hubs 43 USB ports, identifying 4, 5, 43 V vents, identifying 5, 7 video transmission types 47 volume down hotkey, identifying 31 volume mute button 31 volume up hotkey, identifying 31 volume, adjusting 31 W webcam light, identifying 6, 31 webcam, identifying 6, 31 Windows applications key, identifying 3 Windows logo key, identifying 3 Windows, passwords set in 37 wireless antennas 8 wireless controls button 23 operating system 23 wireless icon 22 wireless light, identifying 4, 23 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 26 corporate WLAN connection 26 equipment needed 25 functional range 27 public WLAN connection 26 security 25 wireless network, connecting 22 wireless switch, identifying 4, 23 WLAN antennas, identifying 8 WLAN device 22 writable media 10 WWAN antennas, identifying 8 U unresponsive system 20 USB cable, connecting 43 USB devices connecting 43 description 43 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Index 63 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | User Manual Q44C | Users Manual | 5.00 MiB | / September 12 2009 |
Mini User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your device. To obtain the latest information in the Mini User Guide, go to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/support. Copyright 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: September 2009 Document Part Number: 574399-001 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the device, do not place the device directly on your lap or obstruct the device air vents. Use the device only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The device and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
iii iv Safety warning notice Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Table of contents 1 Hardware features Identifying the hardware ....................................................................................................................... 1 Top components .................................................................................................................. 1 TouchPad ............................................................................................................ 1 Lights ................................................................................................................... 2 Keys .................................................................................................................... 3 Front components ................................................................................................................ 3 Right-side components ........................................................................................................ 4 Left-side components .......................................................................................................... 5 Display components ............................................................................................................ 6 Bottom components ............................................................................................................. 7 Wireless antennas ............................................................................................................... 8 Additional hardware components ........................................................................................ 8 Identifying the labels ............................................................................................................................. 9 2 Wireless and local area network Using wireless devices ....................................................................................................................... 10 Identifying wireless and network status icons .................................................................... 10 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................ 11 Using the wireless button ................................................................................................... 11 Using Wireless Assistant software (select models only) .................................................... 12 Using HP Connection Manager (select models only) ........................................................ 12 Using operating system controls ........................................................................................ 12 Using a WLAN .................................................................................................................................... 13 Setting up a WLAN ............................................................................................................ 13 Protecting your WLAN ....................................................................................................... 13 Connecting to a WLAN ...................................................................................................... 14 Roaming to another network .............................................................................................. 15 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) ............................................................................. 15 Inserting a SIM ................................................................................................................... 16 Removing a SIM ................................................................................................................ 16 Using Bluetooth wireless devices ....................................................................................................... 17 Bluetooth and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) ............................................................. 17 Troubleshooting wireless connection problems ................................................................................. 18 Cannot connect to a WLAN ............................................................................................... 18 Cannot connect to a preferred WLAN network .................................................................. 18 Network icon for WLAN is not displayed ............................................................................ 19 Current WLAN network security codes are unavailable .................................................... 19 v Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
WLAN connection is very weak ......................................................................................... 20 Cannot connect to the wireless router ............................................................................... 20 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) .......................................................................................... 20 3 Multimedia Multimedia features ............................................................................................................................ 22 Identifying your multimedia components ........................................................................... 22 Adjusting the volume ......................................................................................................... 23 Multimedia software ........................................................................................................................... 24 Using other preinstalled multimedia software .................................................................... 25 Installing multimedia software from the Internet ................................................................ 25 Audio .................................................................................................................................................. 25 Connecting external audio devices .................................................................................... 25 Checking your audio functions ........................................................................................... 25 Video .................................................................................................................................................. 26 Connecting an external monitor or projector ...................................................................... 26 Connecting an HDMI device .............................................................................................. 27 Configuring audio for HDMI (select models only) .............................................. 27 Webcam ............................................................................................................................................. 27 4 Digital cards Inserting a digital card ........................................................................................................................ 29 Stopping and Removing a digital card ................................................................................................ 30 5 USB devices Using a USB device ........................................................................................................................... 31 Connecting a USB device .................................................................................................. 31 Stopping and Removing a USB device .............................................................................. 31 Using the HP Mobile Drive (select models only) ................................................................................ 32 Inserting the HP Mini Mobile Drive .................................................................................... 32 Stopping and removing the HP Mini Mobile Drive ............................................................. 32 6 Drives Identifying installed drives .................................................................................................................. 34 Handling drives ................................................................................................................................... 34 Using external drives .......................................................................................................................... 34 Using optional external devices ......................................................................................... 35 7 Memory modules 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Setting pointing device preferences ................................................................................................... 39 vi Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using pointing devices ....................................................................................................................... 39 Using the TouchPad .......................................................................................................... 39 Connecting an external mouse .......................................................................................... 39 Using the keyboard ............................................................................................................................ 39 Using hotkeys .................................................................................................................... 39 Initiating Standby (fn+f1) ................................................................................... 40 Switching the screen image (fn+f2) ................................................................... 41 Decreasing screen brightness (fn+f7) ............................................................... 41 Increasing screen brightness (fn+f8) ................................................................. 41 Initiating QuickLock (fn+f6) ................................................................................ 41 Muting speaker sound (fn+f8) ........................................................................... 41 Decreasing speaker sound (fn+f10) .................................................................. 42 Increasing speaker sound (fn+f11) .................................................................... 42 9 Power management Setting power options ......................................................................................................................... 43 Using power-saving states ................................................................................................. 43 Initiating and exiting Sleep ................................................................................ 43 Initiating and exiting Hibernation ....................................................................... 44 Using the battery meter ..................................................................................................... 44 Using power plans ............................................................................................................. 44 Viewing the current power plan ......................................................................... 44 Selecting a different power plan ........................................................................ 45 Customizing power plans .................................................................................. 45 Setting password protection on wakeup ............................................................................ 45 Using external AC power .................................................................................................................... 45 Connecting the AC adapter ............................................................................................... 46 Testing an AC adapter ....................................................................................................... 46 Using battery power ........................................................................................................................... 47 Finding battery information in Help and Support ............................................................... 47 Using Battery Check .......................................................................................................... 47 Displaying the remaining battery charge ........................................................................... 48 Inserting or removing the battery ....................................................................................... 48 Charging a battery ............................................................................................................. 49 Maximizing battery discharge time .................................................................................... 50 Managing low battery levels .............................................................................................. 50 Identifying low battery levels ............................................................................. 50 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................. 51 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ....... 51 Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available ........................................................................................... 51 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ........................................................................................... 51 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
vii Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ....................................................................................... 51 Calibrating a battery ........................................................................................................... 51 Step 1: Fully charge the battery ........................................................................ 51 Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Sleep ............................................................. 52 Step 3: Discharge the battery ............................................................................ 52 Step 4: Fully recharge the battery ..................................................................... 53 Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Sleep .......................................................... 53 Conserving battery power .................................................................................................. 53 Storing a battery ................................................................................................................ 53 Disposing of a used battery ............................................................................................... 54 Shutting down the device ................................................................................................................... 54 10 Security Protecting the device .......................................................................................................................... 55 Using passwords ................................................................................................................................ 55 Setting passwords in Windows .......................................................................................... 56 Setting passwords in Setup Utility ..................................................................................... 56 Administrator password ..................................................................................... 57 Managing an administrator password ............................................... 57 Entering an administrator password ................................................. 57 Power-on password .......................................................................................... 57 Managing a power-on password ...................................................... 58 Entering a power-on password ......................................................... 58 Using antivirus software ..................................................................................................................... 58 Using firewall software ....................................................................................................................... 58 Installing critical updates .................................................................................................................... 59 11 Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs ...................................................................................................................... 60 Backing up your information ............................................................................................................... 61 When to back up ................................................................................................................ 61 Backup suggestions ........................................................................................................... 61 Using system restore points .............................................................................................. 62 When to create restore points ........................................................................... 62 Create a system restore point ........................................................................... 62 Restore to a previous date and time ................................................................. 62 Performing a recovery ........................................................................................................................ 63 Recovering from the recovery discs .................................................................................. 63 Recovering from the dedicated recovery partition (select models only) ............................ 63 12 Software updates Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 64 viii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................... 64 Downloading a BIOS update ............................................................................................. 65 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................... 66 13 Setup Utility Starting the Setup Utility ..................................................................................................................... 67 Using the Setup Utility ........................................................................................................................ 67 Changing the language of the Setup Utility ....................................................................... 67 Navigating and selecting in the Setup Utility ...................................................................... 67 Displaying system information ........................................................................................... 68 Restoring default settings in the Setup Utility .................................................................... 68 Exiting the Setup Utility ...................................................................................................... 68 Setup Utility menus ............................................................................................................................ 68 Main menu ......................................................................................................................... 69 Security menu .................................................................................................................... 69 System Configuration menu .............................................................................................. 69 Diagnostics menu .............................................................................................................. 70 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 71 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
ix x Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
1 Hardware features Identifying the hardware Components included with the device may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features on most device models. To see a list of hardware installed in the device:
1. 2. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. Select Start > Control panel > System and Security. In the System area, click Device Manager. Top components TouchPad Component
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4) TouchPad*
Left TouchPad button*
Right TouchPad button*
TouchPad scroll zone Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Scrolls up or down.
*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Devices and Printers. Then, right-click the device representing your device, and select Mouse. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Identifying the hardware 1 Lights Component
(1)
(2)
(3) Caps lock light Power light*
Wireless light Description On: Caps lock is on. On: The device is on. Blinking: The device is in Standby. Off: The device is off. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. 2 Chapter 1 Hardware features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Keys Component Description
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Function keys Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. Front components Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Identifying the hardware 3 Component
(1) Battery light Description On: A battery is charging. Blinking: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the device is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the device are fully charged. If the device is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking: The hard drive or flash drive is being accessed. Drive light
(2)
(3) Speakers (2) Produce sound. Right-side components Component Description
(1) SD Card Reader Supports the following optional digital card formats:
(2) Audio-out (headphone) jack/Audio-in (microphone) jack MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or television audio. Also connects an optional headset microphone. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the device speakers are disabled.
(3)
(4)
(5) HP Mobile Drive (select models only) Connects an optional HP Mini Mobile Drive. External monitor port RJ-45 (network) jack Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. Connects a network cable. 4 Chapter 1 Hardware features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Left-side components Component Description
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5) Security cable connector Attaches an optional security cable to the device. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the device from being mishandled or stolen. Power connector Connects an AC adapter. Vent USB port HDMI port Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The device fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connects an optional USB device. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, or any compatible digital or audio component. NOTE: Depending on your computer model, the computer may include an HDMI port or a USB port at this location. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Identifying the hardware 5 Display components Component Description
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4) Internal display switch Webcam light Webcam Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. On: The webcam is in use. Captures still photographs and videos. NOTE: To capture videos, you will need to install additional webcam software. Internal microphone Records and captures sound. 6 Chapter 1 Hardware features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Bottom components Component Description
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4) Battery release latches (2) Release the battery from the battery bay. Battery bay Vents (3) Memory module compartment Holds the battery. Enable airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The device fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Contains the memory module slot and a wireless LAN module slot. Also Holds the hard drive. CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, replace the WLAN module with only a module authorized for use in the computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you replace the module and then receive a warning message, remove the module to restore computer functionality, and then contact technical support through Help and Support. Identifying the hardware 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Wireless antennas NOTE: For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. To see wireless regulatory notices, refer to the section of the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. These notices are located in Help and Support. Additional hardware components Component
(1)
(2) Power cord*
Battery*
Description Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Powers the device when the device is not plugged into external power. 8 Chapter 1 Hardware features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Component
(3) AC adapter Description Converts AC power to DC power.
*Batteries and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. Identifying the labels The labels affixed to the device provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the device. Service tagProvides important information including the following:
Product name (1). This is the product name affixed to the front of your device. Serial number (s/n) (2). This is an alphanumeric identifier that is unique to each product. Part Number/Product number (p/n) (3). This number provides specific information about the hardware components of the product. The part number helps a service technician to determine what components and parts are needed. Model description (4). This is the alphanumeric identifier you use to locate documents, drivers, and support for your device. Warranty period (5). This number describes the duration (in years) of the warranty period for this device. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the device. Microsoft Certificate of AuthenticityContains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the device. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the device, including the following:
Information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The serial number of your HP Mobile Broadband Module (select models only). The regulatory label is affixed inside the battery bay. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Identifying the labels 9 2 Wireless and local area network Using wireless devices Wireless technology transfers data across radio waves instead of wires. Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:
Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, each mobile wireless device communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband ModuleA wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that provides access to information wherever mobile network operator service is available. In a WWAN, each mobile device communicates to a mobile network operators base station. Mobile network operators install networks of base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close together typically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. Computers with WLAN devices support one or more of the following IEEE industry standards:
802.11b, the first popular standard, supports data rates of up to 11 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. 802.11g supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. An 802.11g WLAN device is backward compatible with 802.11b devices, so they can operate on the same network. 802.11a supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 5 GHz. NOTE: 802.11a is not compatible with 802.11b and 802.11g. 802.11n supports data rates of up to 450 Mbps and may operate at 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz, making it backward compatible with 802.11a, b, and g. For more information on wireless technology, refer to the information and Web site links provided in Help and Support. Identifying wireless and network status icons Icon Name Description Wireless (connected) Wireless (disconnected) Identifies the location of the wireless light and the wireless function key on the computer. Also identifies the Wireless Assistant software on the computer and indicates that one or more of the wireless devices are on. Identifies the Wireless Assistant software on the computer and indicates that all of the wireless devices are off. 10 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
HP Connection Manager Wired network (connected) Wired network (disabled/disconnected) Network (disabled/disconnected) Network (connected) Network (disconnected) Opens HP Connection Manager, which enables you to create a connection with an HP Mobile Broadband device (select models only). Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed and one or more network devices are connected to the network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, all network devices or all wireless devices are disabled in Windows Control Panel, and no network devices are connected to a wired network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, no wireless connections are available or all wireless network devices are disabled by the wireless button or Wireless Assistant, and no network devices are connected to a wired network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, one or more network devices are connected to a wireless network, and one or more network devices are connected to a wired network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed and wireless connections are available, but no network devices are connected to a wired or wireless network. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using these features:
Wireless button or wireless switch (referred to in this guide as the wireless button) Wireless Assistant software HP Connection Manager software (select models only) Operating system controls Using the wireless button The computer has a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights, depending on the model. All of the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory, so the wireless light is on (blue) when you turn on the computer. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. If the wireless light is blue, at least one wireless device is on. If the wireless light is off, all wireless devices are off. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless button to turn on or turn off the wireless devices simultaneously. Individual wireless devices can be controlled through Wireless Assistant software (select models only). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using wireless devices 11 Using Wireless Assistant software (select models only) A wireless device can be turned on or off using the Wireless Assistant software. If a wireless device is disabled in the Setup Utility, it must be reenabled in the Setup Utility before it can be turned on or off using Wireless Assistant. NOTE: Enabling or turning on a wireless device does not automatically connect the computer to a network or a Bluetooth-enabled device. To view the state of the wireless devices, click the Show hidden icons icon, the arrow at the left of the notification area, and position the mouse pointer over the wireless icon. If the wireless icon is not displayed in the notification area, complete the following steps to change Wireless Assistant properties:
1. 2. Click the wireless icon in the Wireless Assistant tile, which is located in the bottom row of Windows Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Windows Mobility Center. Mobility Center. Select the check box next to HP Wireless Assistant icon in notification area. 3. Click Properties. 4. 5. Click Apply. 6. Click Close. For more information, refer to the Wireless Assistant software Help:
1. Open Wireless Assistant by clicking the wireless icon in Windows Mobility Center. 2. Click the Help button. Using HP Connection Manager (select models only) You can use HP Connection Manager to connect to WWANs using the HP Mobile Broadband device in your computer (select models only). To start Connection Manager, click the Connection Manager icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or Select Start > All Programs > HP Connection Manager > HP Connection Manager. For more details about using Connection Manager, refer to the Connection Manager software Help. Using operating system controls Some operating systems also offer a way to manage integrated wireless devices and the wireless connection. For example, Windows provides the Network and Sharing Center that allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, manage wireless networks, and diagnose and repair network problems. To access the Network and Sharing Center, select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet >
Network and Sharing Center. For more information, select Start > Help and Support. 12 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using a WLAN With a WLAN device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other computers and accessories that are linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. NOTE: The terms wireless router and wireless access point are often used interchangeably. A large-scale WLAN, such as a corporate or public WLAN, typically uses wireless access points that can accommodate a large number of computers and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which allows several wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without requiring additional pieces of hardware or software. To use the WLAN device in your computer, you must connect to a WLAN infrastructure (provided through a service provider or a public or corporate network). Setting up a WLAN To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:
A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider (ISP) A wireless router (purchased separately) (2) The wireless computer (3) The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. As your network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. For help in setting up your WLAN, refer to the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Protecting your WLAN Because the WLAN standard was designed with only limited security capabilitiesbasically to foil casual eavesdropping rather than more powerful forms of attackit is essential to understand that WLANs are vulnerable to well-known and well-documented security weaknesses. WLANs in public areas, or hotspots, like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. New technologies are being developed by wireless manufacturers and hotspot service providers that make the public environment more secure and anonymous. If you are concerned about the security of your computer in a hotspot, limit your network activities to noncritical e-mail and basic Internet surfing. When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. The common security levels are Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)-
Personal and Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). Because wireless radio signals travel outside the Using a WLAN 13 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
network, other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals and either connect to your network
(uninvited) or capture information being sent across it. However, you can take precautions to protect your WLAN:
Use a wireless transmitter with built-in security Many wireless base stations, gateways, or routers provide built-in security features such as wireless security protocols and firewalls. With the correct wireless transmitter, you can protect your network from the most common wireless security risks. Work behind a firewall A firewall is a barrier that checks both data and requests for data that are sent to your network, and discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in many varieties, both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types. Use wireless encryption A variety of sophisticated encryption protocols is available for your WLAN. Find the solution that works best for your network security:
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a wireless security protocol that encodes or encrypts all network data before it is transmitted using a WEP key. Usually, you can allow the network to assign the WEP key. Alternatively, you can set up your own key, generate a different key, or choose other advanced options. Without the correct key, others will not be able to use the WLAN. WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access), like WEP, uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt data that is transmitted over the network. However, instead of using one static security key for encryptions as WEP does, WPA uses temporal key integrity protocol (TKIP) to dynamically generate a new key for every packet. It also generates different sets of keys for each computer on the network. Connecting to a WLAN To connect to the WLAN, follow these steps:
1. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. If it is on, the wireless light is on. If the wireless light is amber, press the wireless button. 2. Click the network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 3. 4. Click Connect. Select your WLAN from the list. If the network is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a network security key, which is a security code. Type the code, and then click OK to complete the connection. NOTE:
If no WLANs are listed, you are out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE:
If you do not see the network you want to connect to, click Open Network and Sharing Center, and then click Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed. You can choose to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. 14 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
More information about using a WLAN is available through the following resources:
Information from your ISP and the manufacturer's instructions included with your wireless router and other WLAN equipment Information and Web site links provided in Help and Support For a list of public WLANs near you, contact your ISP or search the Web. Web sites that list public WLANs include Cisco Internet Mobile Office Wireless Locations, Hotspotlist, and Geektools. Check with each public WLAN location for cost and connection requirements. For additional information on connecting your computer to a corporate WLAN, contact your network administrator or IT department. Roaming to another network When you move your computer within range of another WLAN, Windows attempts to connect to that network. If the attempt is successful, your computer is automatically connected to the new network. If Windows does not recognize the new network, follow the same procedure you used initially to connect to your WLAN. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) HP Mobile Broadband enables your computer to use wireless wide area networks (WWANs) to access the Internet from more places and over larger areas than it can by using WLANs. Using HP Mobile Broadband requires a network service provider (called a mobile network operator), which in most cases is a mobile phone network operator. Coverage for HP Mobile Broadband is similar to mobile phone voice coverage. When used with mobile network operator service, HP Mobile Broadband gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road or outside the range of Wi-Fi hotspots. HP Mobile Broadband supports the following technologies:
HSPA (High Speed Packet Access), which provides access to networks based on the Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) telecommunications standard. EV-DO (Evolution Data Optimized), which provides access to networks based on the code division multiple access (CDMA) telecommunications standard. You may need the HP Mobile Broadband Module serial number to activate mobile broadband service. The serial number is printed on a label inside the battery bay of your computer. Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM). A SIM contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM that is preinstalled in the battery bay. If the SIM is not preinstalled, it may be provided in the HP Mobile Broadband information provided with your computer, or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information on inserting and removing the SIM, refer to the Inserting a SIM and Removing a SIM sections in this chapter. For information on HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, refer to the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. For additional information, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/mobilebroadband (US only). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) 15 Inserting a SIM CAUTION: To prevent damage to the connectors, use minimal force when inserting a SIM. To insert a SIM:
1. Shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. 6. Remove the battery. 7. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. Insert the SIM into the SIM slot, and gently push the SIM into the slot until it is firmly seated. 8. Replace the battery. NOTE: HP Mobile Broadband will be disabled if the battery is not replaced. 9. Reconnect external power. 10. Reconnect external devices. 11. Turn on the computer. Removing a SIM To remove a SIM:
1. Shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 16 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 5. 6. Remove the battery. 7. Press in on the SIM (1), and then remove it from the slot (2). 8. Replace the battery. 9. Reconnect external power. 10. Reconnect external devices. 11. Turn on the computer. Using Bluetooth wireless devices A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:
Computers (desktop, notebook, PDA) Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a personal area network
(PAN) of Bluetooth devices. For information on configuring and using Bluetooth devices, refer to the Bluetooth software Help. Bluetooth and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) HP does not recommend setting up one computer with Bluetooth as a host and using it as a gateway through which other computers may connect to the Internet. When two or more computers are connected using Bluetooth, and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) is enabled on one of the computers, the other computers may not be able to connect to the Internet using the Bluetooth network. The strength of Bluetooth is in synchronizing information transfers between your computer and wireless devices including cellular phones, printers, cameras, and PDAs. The inability to consistently connect two or more computers to share the Internet through Bluetooth is a limitation of Bluetooth and the Windows operating system. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using Bluetooth wireless devices 17 Troubleshooting wireless connection problems Some possible causes for wireless connection problems include the following:
Network configuration (SSID or security) has been changed. Wireless device is not installed correctly or has been disabled. Wireless device or router hardware has failed. Wireless device encountered interference from other devices. NOTE: Wireless networking devices are included with select computer models only. If wireless networking is not listed in the feature list on the side of the original computer package, you may add wireless networking capability to the computer by purchasing a wireless networking device. Before working your way through the sequence of possible solutions to your network connection problem, be sure that device drivers are installed for all wireless devices. Use the procedures in this chapter to diagnose and repair a computer that does not connect to the network you want to use. Cannot connect to a WLAN If you have a problem connecting to a WLAN, confirm that the integrated WLAN device is properly installed on your computer:
NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. 1. 2. 3. Click the arrow next to Network adapters to expand the list and show all adapters. 4. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security. In the System area, click Device Manager. Identify the WLAN device from the Network adapters list. The listing for a WLAN device may include the terms wireless, wireless LAN, WLAN, Wi-Fi, or 802.11. If no WLAN device is listed, either your computer does not have an integrated WLAN device, or the driver of the WLAN device is not properly installed. For more information on troubleshooting WLANs, refer to the Web site links provided in Help and Support. Cannot connect to a preferred WLAN network Windows can automatically repair a corrupted WLAN connection:
If there is a network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, right-click the icon, and then click Troubleshoot problems. Windows resets your network device and attempts to reconnect to one of the preferred networks. If there is no network icon in the notification area, follow these steps:
1. 2. Click Troubleshoot problems and select the network you wish to repair. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 18 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Network icon for WLAN is not displayed If the network status icon is not displayed in the notification area after you configure the WLAN, the software driver is either missing or corrupted. A Windows Device not Found error message may also be displayed. The driver must be reinstalled. Get the latest version of the WLAN device software and drivers for your computer from the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com. If the WLAN device you are using was purchased separately, consult the manufacturer's Web site for the latest software. To get the latest version of the WLAN device software for your computer, follow these steps:
1. Open your Internet browser and go to http://www.hp.com/support. 2. 3. Click the option for software and driver downloads, and then type your computer model number in Select your country or region. the search box. Press enter, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 4. NOTE:
site for the latest software. If the WLAN device you are using was purchased separately, consult the manufacturer's Web Current WLAN network security codes are unavailable If you are prompted for a network key or a name (SSID) when connecting to a WLAN, the network is protected by security. You must have the current codes to make a connection on a secure network. The SSID and network key are alphanumeric codes that you enter into your computer to identify your computer to the network. For a network connected to your personal wireless router, review the router user guide for instructions on setting up the same codes on both the router and the WLAN device. For a private network, such as a network in an office or at a public Internet chat room, contact the network administrator to obtain the codes, and then enter the codes when prompted to do so. Some networks change the SSID or network keys used in their routers or access points on a regular basis to improve security. You must change the corresponding code in your computer accordingly. If you are provided with new wireless network keys and SSID for a network, and if you have previously connected to that network, follow the steps below to connect to the network:
1. 2. Click Manage wireless networks in the left panel. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 3. A list showing the available WLANs is displayed. If you are in a hotspot where several WLANs are active, several will be displayed. Select the network in the list, right-click the network, and then click Properties. NOTE:
the router or access point is operating. If the network you want is not listed, check with the network administrator to be sure that 4. Click the Security tab and enter the correct wireless encryption data into the Network security key box. 5. Click OK to save these settings. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Troubleshooting wireless connection problems 19 WLAN connection is very weak If the connection is very weak, or if your computer cannot make a connection to a WLAN, minimize interference from other devices, as follows:
Move your computer closer to the wireless router or access point. Temporarily disconnect devices such as a microwave, cordless phone, or cellular phone to be sure that other wireless devices are not interfering. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 1. 2. Click Manage wireless networks in the left panel. A list showing the available WLANs is displayed. If you are in a hotspot where several WLANs are active, several will be displayed. 3. Click a network, and then click Remove. Cannot connect to the wireless router If you are trying to connect to the wireless router and are unsuccessful, reset the wireless router by removing power from the router for 10 to 15 seconds. If the computer still cannot make a connection to a WLAN, restart the wireless router. For details, refer to the router manufacturer's instructions. Connecting to a local area network (LAN) Connecting to a local area network (LAN) requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 network cable (purchased separately). If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (1), which prevents interference from TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable (2) toward the device. To connect the network cable:
WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a modem cable or telephone cable into an RJ-45 (network) jack. 1. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. 20 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
2. Plug the other end of the cable into a network wall jack (2). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Connecting to a local area network (LAN) 21 3 Multimedia Multimedia features Your device includes multimedia features that allow you to listen to music, watch movies, and view pictures. Your device may include the following multimedia components:
Integrated speakers for listening to music Integrated webcam that allows you to capture photographs and videos Preinstalled multimedia software that allows you to play and manage your music, movies, and pictures NOTE: Your device may not include all of the components listed. The following sections explain how to identify and use the multimedia components included with your device. Identifying your multimedia components The following illustration and table describe the multimedia features of the device. 22 Chapter 3 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Component Description
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8) Internal microphone Webcam Webcam light Speakers (2) Volume up hotkey Volume down hotkey Volume mute hotkey Audio-out (headphone) jack/Audio-in
(microphone) jack Records and captures sound. Captures still photographs and videos. NOTE: To capture videos, you will need to install additional webcam software. On: The webcam is in use. Produce sound. Increases device sound when pressed in combination with the fn key. Decreases device sound when pressed combination with the fn key. Mutes device sound when pressed in combination with the fn key. Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or television audio. Also connects an optional headset microphone. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the device speakers are disabled. Adjusting the volume You can adjust the volume using the following controls:
Device volume hotkeyA combination of the fn key (1) and either the f8 (2), f10 (3), or f11 (4) function key:
To mute or restore volume, press fn+f8. To decrease volume, press fn+f10. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Multimedia features 23 To increase volume, press fn+f11. Windows volume control:
a. Click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. b. Increase or decrease the volume by moving the slider up or down. Click the Mute Speakers icon to mute the volume. or a. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, and then click Open Volume Mixer. b. In the Volume Control column, you can increase or decrease the volume by moving the slider up or down. You can also mute the volume by clicking the Mute Speakers icon. If the Speakers icon is not displayed in the notification area, follow these steps to add it:
a. Right-click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left side of the notification area. b. Click Customize notification icons. c. Under Behaviors, select Show icon and notifications for the Volume icon. d. Click OK. Program volume control:
Volume can also be adjusted within some programs. Multimedia software Your device includes preinstalled multimedia software that allows you to play music, watch movies, and view pictures. 24 Chapter 3 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using other preinstalled multimedia software To locate other preinstalled multimedia software:
Select Start > All Programs, and then open the multimedia program you want to use. For example, if you want to use Windows Media Player (select models only), click Windows Media Player. NOTE: Some programs may be located in subfolders. Installing multimedia software from the Internet To install multimedia software from the Internet, go to the software manufacturers Web site and follow the instructions. NOTE: Software downloaded from the Internet may contain viruses. Refer to the Security chapter for more information. Audio Your device has a variety of audio features that allow you to:
Play music using your device speakers and/or connected external speakers. Record sound using an optional external headset microphone. Download music from the Internet. Create multimedia presentations using audio and images. Transmit sound and images with instant messaging programs. Connecting external audio devices WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To connect external devices such as external speakers, headphones, or a headset microphone, refer to the information provided with the device. For best results, remember the following tips:
Be sure that the device cable is securely connected to the correct jack on your device. (Cable connectors are normally color-coded to match the corresponding jacks on the device.) Be sure to install any drivers required by the external device. NOTE: A driver is a required program that acts like a translator between the device and the programs that use the device. Checking your audio functions To check the system sound on your device, follow these steps:
1. Select Start > Control Panel. 2. Click Hardware and Sound. 3. Click Sound. 4. When the Sound and Audio Device Properties window opens, click the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, select any sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and click the arrow button to check the sound. Audio 25 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Sound Recorder. To check the record functions of the device, follow these steps:
1. 2. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. Save the file to your desktop. 3. Open a multimedia program and play back the sound. NOTE: For best results when recording, speak directly into the microphone and record sound in a setting free of background noise. To confirm or change the audio settings on your device, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Sound. Video Your device enables you to use a variety of video features:
Watch movies Play games over the Internet Edit pictures and video to create presentations Connect external video devices Connecting an external monitor or projector Use a VGA cable (purchased separately) to connect an external display, such as a monitor or projector, to the expansion port on the device. To connect an external monitor or projector:
1. Connect the optional VGA cable to the expansion port on the device. 2. Connect the external monitor or projector to the other end of the cable. NOTE:
fn+f2 to transfer the image to the external display. Repeatedly pressing fn+f2 alternates the screen image between the external display and the device. If a properly connected external monitor or projector does not display a screen image, press 26 Chapter 3 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Connecting an HDMI device The device includes an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) port. The HDMI port connects the device to an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, or any compatible digital or audio component. NOTE: To transmit video signals through the HDMI port, you need an HDMI cable (purchased separately). The device can support one HDMI device connected to the HDMI port, while simultaneously supporting an image on the device display or any other supported external display. To connect a video or audio device to the HDMI port:
1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the device. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the video device, according to the device manufacturers instructions. Press fn+f4 on the device to switch the image between the display devices connected to the device. 3. Configuring audio for HDMI (select models only) To configure HDMI audio, first connect an audio or video device, such as a high-definition TV, to the HDMI port on your device. Then configure the default audio playback device as follows:
1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click either Digital Output or Digital Output Device (HDMI). 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. To return audio to the device speakers, follow these steps:
1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. Webcam Your device includes an integrated webcam, located at the top of the display. The webcam is an input device that allows you to capture still photographs and videos. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Webcam 27 NOTE: To capture videos, you will need to install additional webcam software. For optimum performance, observe the following guidelines while using the webcam:
If you are having trouble viewing or sending multimedia files to someone on another LAN or outside your network firewall, temporarily disable the firewall, perform the task you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall as necessary, and adjust the policies and settings of other intrusion detection systems. Whenever possible, place bright light sources behind the camera and out of the picture area. 28 Chapter 3 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
4 Digital cards Optional digital cards provide secure data storage and convenient data sharing. These cards are often used with digital mediaequipped cameras and PDAs as well as with other devices. The SD Card Reader supports the following formats:
MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card Inserting a digital card CAUTION: To avoid damaging the digital card or the device, do not insert any type of adapter into the SD Card Reader. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the digital card connectors, use minimal force to insert a digital card. 1. Hold the digital card label-side up, with the connectors facing the device. 2. Insert the card into the SD Card Reader, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected, and a menu of options may be displayed. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Inserting a digital card 29 Stopping and Removing a digital card CAUTION: To prevent loss of data or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the digital card. 1. Save your information and close all programs associated with the digital card. NOTE: To stop a data transfer, click Cancel in the operating system Copying window. 2. 3. To remove a digital card:
a. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon, click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left side of the notification area). b. Click the name of the digital card in the list. NOTE: You are prompted that it is safe to remove the hardware device. Press in on the digital card (1), and then remove the card from the slot (2). 30 Chapter 4 Digital cards Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
5 USB devices Using a USB device Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a hardware interface that can be used to connect an optional external device, such as a USB keyboard, mouse, drive, printer, scanner, or hub. Devices can be connected to the system, an optional docking device, or an optional expansion product. Some USB devices may require additional support software, which is usually included with the device. For more information about device-specific software, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. The device has 2 USB ports, which support USB 1.0, USB 1.1, and USB 2.0 devices. Depending on the model, the device may also have an HP Mobile Drive, which supports an optional HP Mini Mobile Drive. An optional USB hub, optional docking device, or an optional expansion product provides additional USB ports that can be used with the device. Connecting a USB device CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, use minimal force to connect a USB device. To connect a USB device, connect the USB cable for the device to the USB port. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected. NOTE: When you connect a USB device, you may see a message in the notification area to let you know that the device is recognized by the system. Stopping and Removing a USB device CAUTION: To prevent loss of information or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the USB device. CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, do not pull on the cable to remove the USB device. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using a USB device 31 To remove a USB device:
1. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon, click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left of the notification area). 2. Click the name of the device in the list. NOTE: You are prompted that it is safe to remove the hardware device. 3. Remove the device. Using the HP Mobile Drive (select models only) The HP Mobile Drive is a USB port that allows you to add more storage to your device. The HP Mobile Drive can only be used with the HP Mini Mobile Drive (purchased separately). Inserting the HP Mini Mobile Drive Insert the HP Mini Mobile Drive into the HP Mobile Drive, and then push in until the mini drive is firmly seated and flush with the outside of the device. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected. NOTE: When you connect a USB device, you may see a message in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to let you know that the device is recognized by the system. Stopping and removing the HP Mini Mobile Drive CAUTION: To prevent loss of information or an unresponsive system, stop the HP Mini Mobile Drive before removing it. To stop and remove the HP Mini Mobile Drive:
1. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, click the Show Hidden Icons icon (< or
<<) in the notification area. 2. Click the name of the device in the list. 32 Chapter 5 USB devices Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
3. Click Stop, and then click OK. 4. Remove the HP Mini Mobile Drive. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using the HP Mobile Drive (select models only) 33 6 Drives Identifying installed drives To view the drives installed on the device, select Start > Computer. Handling drives Drives are fragile device components that must be handled with care. Refer to the following cautions before handling drives. Additional cautions are included with the procedures to which they apply. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the device, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:
Before you move a device that is connected to an external hard drive, initiate Standby and allow the screen to clear, or properly disconnect the external hard drive. Before handling a drive, discharge static electricity by touching the unpainted metal surface of the drive. Do not touch the connector pins on a removable drive or on the device. Handle a drive carefully; do not drop a drive or place items on it. Before removing or inserting a drive, shut down the device. If you are unsure whether the device is off, in Standby, or in Hibernation, turn the device on and then shut it down through the operating system. Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive into a drive bay. Do not type on the keyboard or move the device while an optional optical drive is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to vibration. When the battery is the only source of power, be sure that the battery is sufficiently charged before writing to media. Avoid exposing a drive to temperature or humidity extremes. Avoid exposing a drive to liquids. Do not spray the drive with cleaning products. Remove media from a drive before removing the drive from the drive bay, or traveling with, shipping, or storing a drive. If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-
through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, such as conveyor belts, use X-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a drive. Using external drives Removable external drives expand your options for storing and accessing information. 34 Chapter 6 Drives Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
USB drives include the following types:
1.44-megabyte diskette drive Hard drive module (a hard drive with an adapter attached) DVD-ROM Drive DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive DVD+RW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive DVDRW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive Using optional external devices NOTE: For more information about required software and drivers, or to learn which device port to use, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. To connect an external device:
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the equipment when connecting a powered device, be sure that the device is turned off and the AC power cord is unplugged. 1. Connect the device. 2. 3. To disconnect an unpowered external device, turn off the device, and then disconnect it. To disconnect a powered external device, turn off the device, disconnect it, and then unplug the AC power cord. If you are connecting a powered device, plug the device power cord into a grounded AC outlet. Turn on the device. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using external drives 35 7 Memory modules The device has one memory module compartment, which is located on the bottom of the device. The memory capacity of the device can be upgraded by replacing the existing memory module in the primary memory module slot. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock and damage to the equipment, unplug the power cord and remove all batteries before installing a memory module. CAUTION: Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage electronic components. Before beginning any procedure, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. To add or replace a memory module:
1. 2. Save your work. Shut down the device and close the display. If you are not sure whether the device is off or in Hibernation, turn the device on by sliding the power switch. Then shut down the device through the operating system. Turn the device upside down on a flat surface. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the device. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. 6. Remove the battery from the device. 7. Using a small Phillips screwdriver, loosen the 2 cover screws (1). 8. Lift the memory module compartment cover (2) away from the device. 36 Chapter 7 Memory modules Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
9. Remove the existing memory module:
a. Pull away the retention clips (1) on each side of the memory module. The memory module tilts up. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module. b. Grasp the edge of the memory module (2), and gently pull the module out of the memory module slot. To protect a memory module after removal, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 10. Insert a new memory module:
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module, and do not bend the memory module. a. b. With the memory module at a 45-degree angle from the surface of the memory module Align the notched edge (1) of the memory module with the tab in the memory module slot. compartment, press the module (2) into the memory module slot until it is seated. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
37 c. Gently press the memory module (3) down, applying pressure to both the left and right edges of the memory module, until the retention clips snap into place. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, be sure that you do not bend the memory module. 11. Align the tabs on the memory module compartment cover with the notches on the device, and then close the cover (1). 12. Tighten the 2 cover screws (2). 13. Replace the battery. 14. Turn the device right-side up, and then reconnect external power and external devices. 15. Turn on the device. 38 Chapter 7 Memory modules Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
8 Pointing devices and keyboard Setting pointing device preferences Use Mouse Properties in Windows to customize settings for pointing devices, such as button configuration, click speed, and pointer options. To access Mouse Properties, select Start > Devices and Printers. Then, right-click the device representing your device, and select Mouse Using pointing devices Using the TouchPad To move the pointer, slide your finger across the TouchPad surface in the direction you want the pointer to go. Use the TouchPad buttons like the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To scroll up and down using the TouchPad vertical scroll zone, slide your finger up or down over the lines. NOTE:
If you are using the TouchPad to move the pointer, you must lift your finger off the TouchPad before moving it to the scroll zone. Simply sliding your finger from the TouchPad to the scroll zone will not activate the scrolling function. Connecting an external mouse You can connect an external USB mouse to the device using one of the USB ports on the device. Using the keyboard Using hotkeys Hotkeys are combinations of the fn key (1) and one of the function keys (2). The icons on the f1 through f4, and f6, f8, f10, and f11 keys represent the hotkey functions. Hotkey functions and procedures are discussed in the following sections. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Setting pointing device preferences 39 Function Initiate Standby. Switch the image. Decrease screen brightness. Increase screen brightness. Initiate QuickLock. Mute device sound. Decrease device sound. Increase device sound. Hotkey fn+f1 fn+f2 fn+f3 fn+f4 fn+f6 fn+f8 fn+f10 fn+f11 To use a hotkey command on the device keyboard, follow either of these steps:
Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the hotkey command. or Press and hold down the fn key, briefly press the second key of the hotkey command, and then release both keys at the same time. Initiating Standby (fn+f1) Press fn+f1 to initiate Standby. When Standby is initiated, your information is stored in memory, the screen is cleared, and power is conserved. While the device is in Standby, the power light blinks. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of information loss, save your work before initiating Standby. 40 Chapter 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
The device must be on before you can initiate Standby. NOTE:
If a critical battery level occurs while the device is in Standby, the device initiates Hibernation and the information stored in memory is saved to the hard drive. The factory setting for critical battery action is Hibernate, but this setting can be changed in advanced power settings. To exit Standby, briefly slide the power switch. The function of the fn+f1 hotkey can be changed. For example, you can set the fn+f1 hotkey to initiate Hibernation instead of Standby. NOTE:
hotkey. In all Windows operating system windows, references to the sleep button apply to the fn+f1 Switching the screen image (fn+f2) Press fn+f2 to switch the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the device, pressing fn+f2 alternates the screen image from device display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the device and the monitor. Most external monitors receive video information from the device using the external VGA video standard. The fn+f2 hotkey can also alternate images among other devices receiving video information from the device. The following video transmission types, with examples of devices that use them, are supported by the fn+f2 hotkey:
LCD (device display) External VGA (most external monitors) Decreasing screen brightness (fn+f7) Press fn+f7 to decrease screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to decrease the brightness level incrementally. Increasing screen brightness (fn+f8) Press fn+f8 to increase screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to increase the brightness level incrementally. Initiating QuickLock (fn+f6) Press fn+f6 to initiate the QuickLock security feature. QuickLock protects your information by displaying the operating system Log On window. While the Log On window is displayed, the device cannot be accessed until a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password is entered. NOTE: Before you can use QuickLock, you must set a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password. For instructions, refer to Help and Support. To use QuickLock, press fn+f6 to display the Log On window and lock the device. Then follow the instructions on the screen to enter your Windows user password or your Windows administrator password and access the device. Muting speaker sound (fn+f8) Press fn+f8 to mute speaker sound. Press the hotkey again to restore speaker sound. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using the keyboard 41 Decreasing speaker sound (fn+f10) Press fn+f10 to decrease speaker sound. Hold down the hotkey to decrease speaker sound incrementally. Increasing speaker sound (fn+f11) Press fn+f11 to increase speaker sound. Hold down the hotkey to increase speaker sound incrementally. 42 Chapter 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
9 Power management Setting power options Using power-saving states The computer has two power-saving states enabled at the factory: Sleep and Hibernation. When Sleep is initiated, the power lights blink and the screen clears. Your work is saved to memory, letting you exit Sleep faster than exiting Hibernation. If the computer is in the Sleep state for an extended period or if the battery reaches a critical battery level while in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. When Hibernation is initiated, your work is saved to a hibernation file on the hard drive and the computer turns off. CAUTION: To prevent possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep or Hibernation while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. Initiating and exiting Sleep The system is set at the factory to initiate Sleep after 15 minutes of inactivity when running on battery power and 30 minutes of inactivity when running on external power. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. With the device on, you can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:
Press fn+f5. Briefly press the power button. Close the display. Click Start, click the arrow next to the Shut down button, and then click Sleep. You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:
Briefly press the power button. If the display is closed, open the display. Press a key on the keyboard or button on the remote control (select models only). Activate the TouchPad. When the device exits Sleep, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:
before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Setting power options 43 Initiating and exiting Hibernation The system is set at the factory to initiate Hibernation after 1,080 minutes (18 hours) of inactivity when running on both battery power and external power, or when the battery reaches a critical battery level. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. To initiate Hibernation:
Click Start, click the arrow next to the Shut down button, and then click Hibernate. To exit Hibernation:
Briefly press the power button. The power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:
before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password Using the battery meter The battery meter is located in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. The battery meter allows you to quickly access power settings, view remaining battery charge, and select a different power plan. To display the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, move the pointer over the battery meter icon. To access Power Options, or to change the power plan, click the battery meter icon and select an item from the list. Different battery meter icons indicate whether the device is running on battery or external power. The icon also displays a message if the battery has reached a low battery level, critical battery level, or reserve battery level. To hide or display the battery meter icon:
1. Right-click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left side of the notification area). 2. Click Customize notification icons. 3. Under Behaviors, select Show icons and notifications for the Power icon. 4. Click OK. Using power plans A power plan is a collection of system settings that manages how the computer uses power. Power plans can help you conserve power or maximize performance. You can change power plan settings or create your own power plan. Viewing the current power plan Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 44 Chapter 9 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Selecting a different power plan Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then select a power plan from the list. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options, and then select a power plan from the list. Customizing power plans 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. Select a power plan, and then click Change plan settings. 2. 3. Change the settings as needed. 4. To change additional settings, click Change advanced power settings and make your changes. Setting password protection on wakeup To set the device to prompt for a password when the device exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:
Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 1. In the left pane, click Require a password on wakeup. 2. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. Click Require a password (recommended). If you need to create a user account password or change your current user account NOTE:
password, click Create or change your user account password, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you do not need to create or change a user account password, go to step 5. 5. Click Save changes. Using external AC power External AC power is supplied through one of the following devices:
WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the device, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. Approved AC adapter Optional docking device or expansion product Connect the device to external AC power under any of the following conditions:
WARNING! Do not charge the device battery while you are onboard aircraft. When you are charging or calibrating a battery When you are installing or modifying system software When you are writing information to a CD or DVD Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using external AC power 45 When you connect the device to external AC power, the following events occur:
The battery begins to charge. If the device is turned on, the battery meter icon in the notification area changes appearance. When you disconnect external AC power, the following events occur:
The device switches to battery power. The display brightness is automatically decreased to save battery life. To increase display brightness, press the fn+f8 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. Connecting the AC adapter WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the device by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the device). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-
pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. To connect the device to external AC power:
1. 2. 3. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector (1) on the device. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter (2). Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet (3). Testing an AC adapter Test the AC adapter if the device exhibits any of the following symptoms when it is connected to AC power:
The device will not turn on. The display does not turn on. The power light is off. 46 Chapter 9 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
To test the AC adapter:
1. Remove the battery from the device. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the device, and then plug it into an AC outlet. 3. Turn on the device. If the power light turns on, the AC adapter is working properly. Contact technical support for information on obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. Using battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is plugged into external AC power, the computer runs on AC power. If the computer contains a charged battery and is running on external AC power supplied through the AC adapter, the computer switches to battery power if the AC adapter is disconnected from the computer. NOTE: The display brightness is decreased to save battery life when you disconnect AC power. To increase display brightness, use the fn+f8 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. You can keep a battery in the computer or in storage, depending on how you work. Keeping the battery in the computer whenever the computer is plugged into AC power charges the battery and also protects your work in case of a power outage. However, a battery in the computer slowly discharges when the computer is off and unplugged from external power. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, display brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Finding battery information in Help and Support The Help and Support Power and Battery Learning Center provides the following tools and information:
Battery Check tool to test battery performance Information on calibration, power management, and proper care and storage to maximize battery life Information on battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity To access battery information:
Select Start > Help and Support > Learn > Power and Battery Learning Center. Using Battery Check Battery Check, a part of the HP Support Assistant, provides information on the status of the battery installed in the computer. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using battery power 47 To run Battery Check:
1. Connect the AC adapter to the computer. NOTE: The computer must be connected to external power for Battery Check to function properly. Select Start > Help and Support > Troubleshoot > Power, Thermal and Mechanical >Battery Check. 2. Battery Check examines the battery and its cells to see if they are functioning properly, and then reports the results of the examination. Displaying the remaining battery charge Move the pointer over the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Inserting or removing the battery CAUTION: Removing a battery that is the sole power source may cause loss of information. To prevent loss of information, save your work and initiate Hibernation or shut down the device through Windows before removing the battery. To insert the battery:
1. Disconnect all external devices. 2. 3. 4. If the device is connected to AC power, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Turn the device upside down on a flat surface. Align the tabs on the battery with the notches on the device (1), and then insert the battery into the battery bay. The battery release latches (2) automatically lock the battery into place. To remove the battery:
1. Disconnect all external devices. 2. 3. If the device is connected to AC power, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Turn the device upside down on a flat surface. 48 Chapter 9 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
4. Slide the battery release latches (1) to release the battery, and then remove the battery (2). Charging a battery WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. The battery charges whenever the computer is plugged into external power through an AC adapter, an optional power adapter, an optional expansion product, or an optional docking device. The battery charges whether the computer is off or in use, but it charges faster when the computer is off. Charging may take longer if a battery is new, has been unused for 2 weeks or more, or is much warmer or cooler than room temperature. To prolong battery life and optimize the accuracy of battery charge displays, follow these recommendations:
If the computer is on while the battery is charging, the battery meter in the notification If you are charging a new battery, charge it fully before turning on the computer. Charge the battery until the battery light turns off. NOTE:
area may show 100 percent charge before the battery is fully charged. Allow the battery to discharge below 5 percent of a full charge through normal use before charging it. If the battery has been unused for one month or more, calibrate the battery instead of simply charging it. The battery light displays charge status:
On: The battery is charging. Blinking: The battery has reached a low battery level or critical battery level and is not charging. Off: The battery is fully charged, in use, or not installed. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using battery power 49 Maximizing battery discharge time Battery discharge time varies depending on the features you use while on battery power. Maximum discharge time gradually shortens, as the battery storage capacity naturally degrades. Tips for maximizing battery discharge time:
Lower the brightness on the display. Check the Power saver setting in Power Options. Remove the battery from the device when it is not being used or charged. Store the battery in a cool, dry location. Managing low battery levels The information in this section describes the alerts and system responses set at the factory. Some low-
battery alerts and system responses can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. Preferences set using Power Options do not affect lights. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low battery level, the battery light blinks. If a low battery level is not resolved, the device enters a critical battery level, and the battery light begins blinking rapidly. The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:
If Hibernation is enabled and the device is on or in the Sleep state, the device initiates Hibernation. If Hibernation is disabled and the device is on or in the Sleep state, the device remains briefly in the Sleep state, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. 50 Chapter 9 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Resolving a low battery level CAUTION: To reduce the risk of losing information when the computer reaches a critical battery level and has initiated Hibernation, do not restore power until the power lights turn off. Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following devices:
AC adapter Optional expansion product or docking device Optional power adapter Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available Turn off the computer or initiate Hibernation. 1. 2. Remove the discharged battery, and then insert a charged battery. 3. Turn on the computer. Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Initiate Hibernation. or Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the computer lacks sufficient power to exit Hibernation, follow these steps:
1. 2. Insert a charged battery or plug the computer into external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Calibrating a battery Calibrate a battery under the following conditions:
When battery charge displays seem inaccurate When you observe a significant change in battery run time Even if a battery is heavily used, it should not need to be calibrated more than once a month. It is also not necessary to calibrate a new battery. Step 1: Fully charge the battery WARNING! Do not charge the device battery while you are onboard aircraft. NOTE: The battery charges whether the device is off or in use, but it charges faster when the device is off. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using battery power 51 To fully charge the battery:
1. 2. Connect the device to an AC adapter, optional power adapter, optional expansion product, or Insert the battery into the device. optional docking device, and then plug the adapter or device into external power. The battery light on the device turns on. Leave the device plugged into external power until the battery is fully charged. The battery light on the device turns off. 3. Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Sleep 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 2. Under the current power plan, click Change plan settings. 3. Record the Turn off the display settings listed in the On battery column so that you can reset them after the calibration. 4. Change the Turn off the display settings to Never. 5. Click Change advanced power settings. 6. Click the plus sign next to Sleep, and then click the plus sign next to Hibernate after. 7. Record the On battery setting under Hibernate after so that you can reset it after the calibration. 8. Change the On battery setting to Never. 9. Click OK. 10. Click Save changes. Step 3: Discharge the battery The device must remain on while the battery is being discharged. The battery can discharge whether or not you are using the device, but the battery will discharge faster while you are using it. If you plan to leave the device unattended during the discharge, save your information before beginning the discharge procedure. If you use the device occasionally during the discharge procedure and have set energy-saving timeouts, expect the following performance from the system during the discharge process:
The monitor will not turn off automatically. Hard drive speed will not decrease automatically when the device is idle. System-initiated Hibernation will not occur. To discharge a battery:
1. Unplug the device from its external power source, but do not turn off the device. 2. Run the device on battery power until the battery is discharged. The battery light begins to blink when the battery has discharged to a low battery level. When the battery is discharged, the battery light turns off and the device shuts down. 52 Chapter 9 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Step 4: Fully recharge the battery To recharge the battery:
1. Plug the device into external power and maintain external power until the battery is fully recharged. When the battery is recharged, the battery light on the device turns off. You can use the device while the battery is recharging, but the battery will charge faster if the device is off. If the device is off, turn it on when the battery is fully charged and the battery light has turned off. 2. Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Sleep CAUTION: Failure to reenable Hibernation after calibration may result in a full battery discharge and information loss if the device reaches a critical battery level. 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 2. Under the current power plan, click Change plan settings. 3. Reenter the settings that you recorded for the items in the On battery column. 4. Click Change advanced power settings. 5. Click the plus sign next to Sleep, and then click the plus sign next to Hibernate after. 6. Reenter the setting that you recorded for On battery. 7. Click OK. 8. Click Save changes. Conserving battery power Select the Power saver power plan through Power Options under System and Security in Windows Control Panel. Turn off wireless and local area network (LAN) connections and exit modem applications when you are not using them. Disconnect external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, when you are not using them. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Use the fn+f7 and fn+f8 hotkeys to adjust screen brightness as needed. If you leave your work, initiate Sleep or Hibernation, or shut down the device. Storing a battery CAUTION: To prevent damage to a battery, do not expose it to high temperatures for extended periods of time. If a computer will be unused and unplugged from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. To prolong the charge of a stored battery, place it in a cool, dry place. Using battery power 53 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Calibrate a battery before using it if it has been stored for one month or more. Disposing of a used battery WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. For additional information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices included with this device. Shutting down the device CAUTION: Unsaved information will be lost when the device is shut down. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and device. Shut down the device under any of the following conditions:
When you need to replace the battery or access components inside the device When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB port When the device will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period Although you can shut down the device with the power button, the recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. To shut down the device:
NOTE:
before shutdown is possible. 1. 2. Click Start. 3. Click Shut down. If the device is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:
Press ctrl+alt+delete, and then click the Power button. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the device from external power and remove the battery. If the device is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, you must first exit Sleep or Hibernation Save your work and close all open programs. 54 Chapter 9 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
10 Security Protecting the device Standard security features provided by the Windows operating system and the non-Windows Setup Utility can protect your personal settings and data from a variety of risks. Follow the procedures in this chapter to use the following features:
Passwords Firewall software Critical security updates NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents, but they may not deter software attacks or prevent the device from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: Before you send your device for service, remove all password settings. Device risk Unauthorized use of the device Unauthorized access to data Unauthorized access to Setup Utility, BIOS settings, and other system identification information Security feature QuickLock Power-on password Firewall software Windows updates Administrator password Ongoing or future threats to the device Critical security updates from Microsoft Unauthorized access to a Windows user account User password Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your device information. Several types of passwords can be set, depending on how you want to control access to your information. Passwords can be set in Windows or in the non-Windows Setup Utility preinstalled on the device. CAUTION: To prevent being locked out of the device, record each password you set. Because most passwords are not displayed as they are set, changed, or deleted, it is essential to record each password immediately and store it in a secure place. You can use the same password for a Setup Utility feature and for a Windows security feature. You can also use the same password for more than one Setup Utility feature. Use the following guidelines when setting a password in Setup Utility:
A password can be any combination of up to 8 letters and numbers and is case sensitive. A password set in the Setup Utility must be entered at a Setup Utility prompt. A password set in Windows must be entered at a Windows prompt. Protecting the device 55 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:
When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Write down your passwords and store them in a secure place away from the device. Do not store passwords in a file on the device. Do not use your name or other personal information that could be easily discovered by an outsider. The following sections list Windows and Setup Utility passwords and describe their functions. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords, select Start > Help and Support. Setting passwords in Windows Password Administrator password User password QuickLock Setting passwords in Setup Utility Password Administrator password*
Power-on password*
Function Protects administrator-level access to device contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility contents. Protects access to a Windows user account. It also protects access to the device contents and must be entered when you exit Standby or Hibernation. Protects the device by requiring a password to be entered in the Windows Log On dialog box before you access the device. After you set a user or administrator password, follow these steps:
1. 2. Initiate QuickLock by pressing fn+f6. Exit QuickLock by entering your Windows user or administrator password. Function Protects access to Setup Utility. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you access Setup Utility. CAUTION:
cannot access Setup Utility. If you forget your administrator password, you Protects access to the device contents. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you turn on or restart the device, or exit Hibernation. CAUTION:
If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the device, or exit Hibernation.
*For details about each of these passwords, refer to the following topics. 56 Chapter 10 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Administrator password Your administrator password protects the configuration settings and system identification information in Setup Utility. After this password is set, you must enter it each time you access Setup Utility. Your administrator password is not interchangeable with an administrator password set in Windows, nor is it displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. Be sure that you record your password and store it in a safe place. Managing an administrator password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:
1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10
= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Set Administrator Password, and then press enter. To set an administrator password, type your password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To change an administrator password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, type a new password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To delete an administrator password, type your current password in the Enter Password field, and then press enter 4 times. 3. To save your changes and exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes. Your changes go into effect when the device restarts. Entering an administrator password At the Enter Password prompt, type your administrator password, and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the administrator password, you must restart the device and try again. Power-on password Your power-on password prevents unauthorized use of the device. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you turn on or restart the device, or exit Hibernation. A power-on password is not displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Using passwords 57 Managing a power-on password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:
1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10
= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Set Power-On Password, and then press enter. To set a power-on password, type your password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To change a power-on password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, type a new password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To delete a power-on password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, and then press enter 4 times. 3. To save your changes and exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes. Your changes go into effect when the device restarts. Entering a power-on password At the Enter Password prompt, type your password, and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the password, you must restart the device and try again. Using antivirus software When you use the device for e-mail or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. NOTE: HP recommends that you install antivirus software to help protect your device. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. NOTE: For more information about computer viruses, type viruses in the Search field in Help and Support. Using firewall software When you use the device for e-mail, network, or Internet access, unauthorized persons may be able to gain access to the device, your personal files, and information about you. Use the firewall software preinstalled on the device to protect your privacy. Firewall features include logging and reporting of network activity, and automatic monitoring of all incoming and outgoing traffic. Refer to the firewall user guide or contact your firewall manufacturer for more information. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to Internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized e-mail attachments. To temporarily resolve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. 58 Chapter 10 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Installing critical updates CAUTION: Microsoft sends alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the device from security breaches and device viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. Updates to the operating system and other software may have become available after the device was shipped. To be sure that all available updates are installed on the device, observe these guidelines:
Run Windows Update as soon as possible after you set up your device. Use the update link at Start > All Programs > Windows Update. Run Windows Update at regular intervals, such as once a month. Obtain updates to Windows and other Microsoft programs, as they are released, from the Microsoft Web site and through the updates link in Help and Support. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Installing critical updates 59 11 Backup and recovery Recovery after a system failure is as complete as your most current backup. HP recommends that you create recovery discs immediately after software setup. As you add new software and data files, you should continue to back up your system on a regular basis to maintain a reasonably current backup. Tools provided by the operating system and HP Recovery Manager software are designed to help you with the following tasks for safeguarding your information and restoring it in case of a system failure:
Creating a set of recovery discs (Recovery Manager software feature). Recovery discs are used to start up (boot) your computer and restore the operating system and software programs to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. Backing up your information regularly to protect your important system files. Creating system restore points (operating system feature). System restore points allow you to reverse undesirable changes to your computer by restoring the computer to an earlier state. Recovering a program or driver (Recovery Manager software feature). This feature helps you reinstall a program or driver without performing a full system recovery. Performing a full system recovery (Recovery Manager software feature). With Recovery Manager, you can recover your full factory image if you experience system failure or instability. Recovery Manager works from a dedicated recovery partition (select models only) on the hard drive or from recovery discs you create. NOTE:
If your computer includes a solid-state drive (SSD), you may not have a recovery partition. Recovery discs have been included for computers that do not have a partition. Use these discs to recover your operating system and software. To check for the presence of a recovery partition, select Start > Computer. If the partition is present, an HP Recovery drive is listed in the Hard Disk Drives section of the window. Creating recovery discs HP recommends that you create recovery discs to be sure that you can restore your system to its original factory state if you experience serious system failure or instability. Create these discs after setting up the computer for the first time. Handle these discs carefully and keep them in a safe place. The software allows the creation of only one set of recovery discs. NOTE:
If your computer does not include an internal optical drive, you can use an optional external optical drive (purchased separately) to create recovery discs, or you can purchase recovery discs for your computer from the HP Web site. 60 Chapter 11 Backup and recovery Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Note the following guidelines before creating recovery discs:
You will need high-quality DVD-R, double-layer DVD-R, DVD+R, double-layer DVD+R, BD-R
(writable Blu-ray), or CD-R discs. All these discs are purchased separately. DVDs and BDs have a much higher capacity than CDs. If you use CDs, up to 20 discs may be required, whereas only a few DVDs or BDs are required. NOTE: Read-write discs, such as CD-RW, DVDRW, double-layer DVDRW, and BD-RE
(rewritable Blu-ray) discs, are not compatible with the Recovery Manager software. The computer must be connected to AC power during this process. Only one set of recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you open Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue the disc creation process. To create a set of recovery discs:
1. Select Start > All Programs > Recovery Manager > Recovery Manager. Recovery Manager opens. 2. Click Advanced Options. NOTE:
AC power before you can go to the next step. If you are operating the computer on battery power, you will be prompted to connect to 3. Click Recovery disc creation, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up your information When to back up On a regularly scheduled basis NOTE: Set reminders to back up your information periodically. Before the computer is repaired or restored Before you add or modify hardware or software Backup suggestions Create a set of recovery discs using Recovery Manager. Create system restore points using the Windows System Restore feature, and periodically copy them to disc. Store personal files in the Documents folder and back up this folder periodically. Back up templates stored in their associated programs. Save customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time-saver if you have to reset your preferences. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Backing up your information 61 To copy the screen and paste it into a word-processing document, follow these steps:
a. Display the screen. b. Copy the screen:
To copy only the active window, press alt+fn+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press fn+prt sc. c. Open a word-processing document, and then select Edit > Paste. Using system restore points When you back up your system, you are creating a system restore point. A system restore point allows you to save and name a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then recover back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system. NOTE: Recovering to an earlier restore point does not affect data files saved or e-mails created since the last restore point. You also can create additional restore points to provide increased protection for your system files and settings. When to create restore points Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally NOTE:
If you revert to a restore point and then change your mind, you can reverse the restoration. Create a system restore point Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > System. In the left pane, click System Protection. 1. 2. 3. Click the System Protection tab. 4. Under Protection Settings, select the disk for which you want to create a restore point. 5. Click Create. The System Protection window opens. Follow the on-screen instructions. 6. Restore to a previous date and time Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > System. In the left pane, click System protection. To revert to a restore point (created at a previous date and time), when the computer was functioning optimally, follow these steps:
1. 2. 3. Click the System Protection tab. 4. Click the System Restore button, and then click Next. The System Restore window opens. Follow the on-screen instructions. 5. 62 Chapter 11 Backup and recovery Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Performing a recovery NOTE: You can recover only files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. Recovery Manager software allows you to repair or restore the system if you experience system failure or instability. Recovery Manager works from recovery discs or from a dedicated recovery partition (select models only) on the hard drive. However, if your computer includes a solid-state drive (SSD), you may not have a recovery partition. If that is the case, recovery discs have been included with your computer. Use these discs to recover your operating system and software. NOTE: Windows has its own built-in repair features, such as System Restore and driver roll-back capabilities. If you have not already tried these features, try them before using Recovery Manager. NOTE: Recovery Manager recovers only software that was preinstalled at the factory. Software not provided with this computer must be downloaded from the manufacturer's Web site or reinstalled from the disc provided by the manufacturer. Recovering from the recovery discs To restore the system from the recovery discs:
1. 2. 3. Back up all personal files. Insert the first recovery disc into the optical drive and restart the computer. Follow the on-screen instructions. Recovering from the dedicated recovery partition (select models only) NOTE:
If your computer includes an SSD, you may not have a recovery partition. You will not be able to recover using this procedure. Recovery discs have been included for computers that do not have a partition. Use these discs to recover your operating system and software. On some models, you can perform a recovery from the partition on the hard drive from either the Start button or f11. This restores the computer to it's factory condition. To restore the system from the partition, follow these steps:
1. Access Recovery Manager in either of the following ways:
Select Start > All Programs > Recovery Manager > Recovery Manager. or Restart the computer and press f11 while the Press <F11> for recovery message is displayed on the screen. Then select Recovery Manager. Recovery Manager opens. 2. Click Advanced Options. 3. Click System recovery, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Performing a recovery 63 12 Software updates Updated versions of the software provided with your device may be available on the HP Web site. Most software and BIOS updates on the HP Web site are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. To update the software, follow these steps, which are explained in the remainder of this guide:
1. Identify your device model, product category, and series or family. Prepare for a system BIOS update by identifying the BIOS version currently installed on the device. If your device is connected to a network, consult the network administrator before installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. NOTE: The device system BIOS is stored on the system ROM. The BIOS initializes the operating system, determines how the device will interact with the hardware devices, and provides for data transfer among hardware devices, including the time and date. Access the updates on the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com. Install the updates. Updating the BIOS 2. 3. To update the BIOS, first determine what BIOS version you currently have and then download and install the new BIOS. Determining the BIOS version To determine whether available BIOS updates contain later BIOS versions than those currently installed on the device, you need to know the version of the system BIOS currently installed. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be displayed by opening the Setup Utility. To display the BIOS information:
1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10
= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. If the Setup Utility does not open with the system information displayed, use the arrow keys to select the Main menu. When the Main menu is selected, BIOS and other system information is displayed. To exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. 2. 3. 64 Chapter 12 Software updates Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To prevent damage to the device or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the device is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the device is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:
Do not disconnect power from the device by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the device or initiate Standby or Hibernation. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. To download a BIOS update:
1. Access the page on the HP Web site that provides software for your device:
Select Start > Help and Support > Maintain, and then select the software and drivers update. Follow the instructions on the screen to identify your device and access the BIOS update you want to download. At the download area, follow these steps:
a. Identify the BIOS update that is later than the BIOS version currently installed on your device. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the instructions on the screen to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update will be downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. 2. 3. b. NOTE:
any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If you connect your device to a network, consult the network administrator before installing BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed, follow these steps:
1. Open Windows Explorer by selecting Start > Computer. 2. Double-click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the instructions on the screen. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Updating the BIOS 65 Updating programs and drivers 2. 3. To download and install software other than a BIOS update, follow these steps:
1. Access the page on the HP Web site that provides software for your device:
Select Start > Help and Support, and then select the software and drivers update. Follow the instructions on the screen to find the software you want to update. At the download area, select the software you want to download and follow the instructions on the screen. NOTE: Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the software will be downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the software. 4. When the download is complete, open Windows Explorer by selecting Start > Computer. 5. Double-click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 6. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 7. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The installation begins. 8. Complete the installation by following the instructions on the screen. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. 66 Chapter 12 Software updates Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
13 Setup Utility Starting the Setup Utility The Setup Utility is a ROM-based information and customization utility that can be used even when your Windows operating system is not working. The utility reports information about the device and provides settings for startup, security, and other preferences. To start the Setup Utility:
Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10
= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. Using the Setup Utility Changing the language of the Setup Utility The following procedure explains how to change the language of the Setup Utility. If the Setup Utility is not already running, begin at step 1. If the Setup Utility is already running, begin at step 2. 1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10
= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select System Configuration > Language, and then press enter. 3. Use the arrow keys to select a language, and then press enter. 4. When a confirmation prompt with your language selected is displayed, press enter. 5. To save your change and exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. Your change goes into effect immediately. Navigating and selecting in the Setup Utility Because the Setup Utility is not Windows based, it does not support the TouchPad. Navigation and selection are by keystroke. To choose a menu or a menu item, use the arrow keys. To choose an item in a list or to toggle a field, for example an Enable/Disable field, use either the arrow keys or f5 or f6. To select an item, press enter. To close a text box or return to the menu display, press esc. To display additional navigation and selection information while the Setup Utility is open, press f1. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Starting the Setup Utility 67 Displaying system information The following procedure explains how to display system information in the Setup Utility. If the Setup Utility is not open, begin at step 1. If the Setup Utility is open, begin at step 2. 1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10 2. 3.
= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. Select the Main menu. System information such as the system time and date, and identification information about the device is displayed. To exit the Setup Utility without changing any settings, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. Restoring default settings in the Setup Utility The following procedure explains how to restore the Setup Utility default settings. If the Setup Utility is not already running, begin at step 1. If the Setup Utility is already running, begin at step 2. 1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10
= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Exit > Load Setup Defaults, and then press enter. 3. When the Setup Confirmation is displayed, press enter. 4. To save your change and exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. The Setup Utility default settings go into effect when the device restarts. NOTE: Your password, security, and language settings are not changed when you restore the factory default settings. Exiting the Setup Utility You can exit the Setup Utility with or without saving changes. To exit the Setup Utility and save your changes from the current session:
If the Setup Utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display. Then use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. To exit the Setup Utility without saving your changes from the current session:
If the Setup Utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display. Then use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. After either choice, the device restarts in Windows. Setup Utility menus The menu tables in this section provide an overview of Setup Utility options. NOTE: Some of the Setup Utility menu items listed in this chapter may not be supported by your device. 68 Chapter 13 Setup Utility Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Main menu Select System information Security menu Select Administrator password Power-On Password System Configuration menu To do this View and change the system time and date. View identification information about the device. View specification information about the processor, memory size, and system BIOS. To do this Enter, change, or delete an administrator password. Enter, change, or delete a power-on password. Select Language Support Processor C4 State Boot Options To do this Change the Setup Utility language. Enable/disable the processor C4 sleep state. Set the following boot options:
f10 and f12 Delay (sec.)Set the delay for the f10 and f12 functions of the Setup Utility in intervals of 5 seconds each (0, 5, 10, 15, 20). Internal Network Adapter bootEnable/disable boot from Internal Network Adapter. Boot OrderSet the boot order for:
Internal hard drive (select models only) USB Floppy USB CD/DVD ROM Drive USB Diskette on Key USB Hard drive USB Card Reader Network adapter NOTE: Only the devices attached to the system will appear in the boot order menu. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Setup Utility menus 69 Diagnostics menu Select To do this Hard Disk Self Test (select models only) Run a comprehensive self-test on the hard drive. Memory Test Run a diagnostic test on the system memory. 70 Chapter 13 Setup Utility Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Index A AC adapter administrator password connecting 46 identifying 9 testing 46 creating 57 entering 57 managing 57 airport security devices 34 antennas 8 applications key, Windows 3 audio devices, connecting external 25 audio functions, checking 25 audio-in (microphone) jack 4, 23 audio-out (headphone) jack 4, 23 B backing up customized window, toolbar, and menu bar settings 61 personal files 61 templates 61 backup suggestions 61 battery calibrating 51 charging 49, 51 conserving power 53 discharging 50 disposing 54 identifying 8 inserting 48 low battery levels 50 recharging 53 removing 48 storing 53 battery bay, identifying 7 Battery Check 47 battery light 4, 49, 50 battery power 47 battery release latches 7, 48 battery temperature 53 bay, battery 7 BIOS, updating 64 Bluetooth device 10 boot options 69 boot order 69 button, volume mute 23 buttons left TouchPad 1 right TouchPad 1 C cables LAN 20 USB 31 VGA 26 caps lock light, identifying 2 CD drive 35 changing the Setup Utility language 67 charging batteries 49, 51 checking audio functions 25 compartments, memory module 7 components additional hardware 8 bottom 7 display 6 front 3 left-side 5 right-side 4 TouchPad 1 connecting to a WLAN 14 connection, external power 46 connector, security cable 5 conservation, power 53 cord, power 8 corporate WLAN connection 14 critical battery level 50 D Diagnostics menu 70 digital card inserting 29 removing 30 stopping 30 diskette drive 35 display image, switching 41 screen brightness hotkeys 41 display switch, identifying 6 displaying system information 68 drive light, identifying 4 drive media 43 drives diskette 35 external 34 hard 34 optical 35 drives, boot order 69 DVD drive 35 E earbuds 4, 23 encryption 14 entering a power-on password 58 entering an administrator password 57 esc key 3 exiting the Setup Utility 68 expansion port 26 external audio devices, connecting 25 external drive 34 external monitor port, identifying 4 F f11 63 f11 recovery 63 firewall 14 fn key 3, 39 full system recovery 60 function keys 3, 39 H hard disk drive, external 34 Index 71 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
hard drive 7 hard drive self test 70 hard drive, external 34 hardware, identifying 1 HDMI port 27 HDMI port, identifying 5 HDMI, connecting 27 headphone (audio-out) jack 4, 23 headphones 4, 23 Hibernation exiting 44 initiated during critical battery level 50 initiating 44 high-definition devices, connecting 27 hotkeys decreasing screen brightness 41 internal display switch, identifying 6 internal microphone, identifying 6, 23 Internet connection setup 13 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 4, 23 audio-out (headphone) 4, 23 RJ-45 (network) 4 K keyboard hotkeys, identifying 39 keys esc 3 fn 3 function 3 Windows applications 3 Windows logo 3 decreasing speaker sound 42 description 39 increasing screen brightness 41 increasing speaker volume 42 initiating QuickLock 41 initiating Standby 40 muting speaker sound 41 switching screen image 41 using 40 L labels Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 9 regulatory 9 service tag 9 language support 69 latches, battery release 7 left TouchPad button, HP Connection Manager software 12 HP Mini Mobile Drive inserting 32 removing 32 stopping 32 HP Mobile Broadband Module 15, 16 HP Mobile Drive identifying 4 using 32 HP USB Ethernet Adapter, connecting 20 hubs 31 I icons network 10, 19 wireless 10 interference, minimizing 20 identifying 1 lights battery 4 caps lock 2 drive 4 power 2 webcam 6 wireless 2 local area network (LAN) cable required 20 connecting cable 20 low battery level 50 M Main menu 69 managing a power-on password 58 managing an administrator password 57 memory module compartment memory module inserting 37 removing 37 cover removing 36 replacing 38 memory module compartment, identifying 7 memory test 70 microphone (audio-in) jack 4, 23 minimizing interference 20 monitor port, external 4 monitor, connecting 26 mouse, external connecting 39 setting preferences 39 multimedia components, identifying 22 multimedia software installing 25 using 25 mute button 23 mute hotkey, identifying 23 N navigating in the Setup Utility 67 network cable connecting 20 noise suppression circuitry 20 network cable, connecting 20 network icon 10, 19 network jack, identifying 4 network key 19 network security codes network key 19 SSID 19 noise suppression circuitry, network cable 20 O operating system 54 optical drive 35 P passwords administrator 57 power-on 57 set in Setup Utility 56 set in Windows 56 72 Index Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
ports expansion 26 external monitor 4 HDMI 5, 27 USB 5, 31 power connecting 46 conserving 53 power connector, identifying 5 power cord, identifying 8 power light, identifying 2 power-on password creating 58 entering 58 managing 58 Processor C4 State 69 product name and number, device 9 programs, updating 66 projector, connecting 26 public WLAN connection 14 Q QuickLock 56 QuickLock hotkey 41 R readable media 43 recovering a program or driver 60 recovering from the dedicated recovery partition 63 recovering from the recovery discs 63 recovery discs 60 Recovery Manager 60, 63 recovery partition 60 recovery, system 63 regulatory information HP Mobile Broadband Module serial number 9 regulatory label 9 wireless 9 release latches battery 7, 49 restore points 62 restoring default settings 68 right TouchPad button, identifying 1 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 4 S screen brightness hotkeys 41 screen image, switching 41 SD Card Reader, identifying 4 security cable connector, identifying 5 Security menu 69 security, wireless 13 selecting in the Setup Utility 67 serial number, device 9 service tag 9 setup of WLAN 13 Setup Utility, passwords set in 56 setup, device 1 shutdown 54 shutting down 54 SIM inserting 16 removing 16 Sleep exiting 43 initiating 43 software HP Connection Manager 12 installing 25 multimedia 25 Windows Media Player 25 Wireless Assistant 12 solid-state drive (SSD) 60, 63 speakers, identifying 4, 23 Standby hotkey 40 storing battery 53 supported discs 61 System Configuration menu 69 system failure or instability 60 system information 69 system recovery 63 system restore points 60, 62 T temperature 53 TouchPad buttons 1 identifying 1 using 39 TouchPad scroll zone, identifying 1 traveling with the computer 53 turning off the device 54 U unresponsive system 54 USB cable, connecting 31 USB devices connecting 31 description 31 removing 31 stopping 31 USB hubs 31 USB ports, identifying 5, 31 V vents, identifying 5, 7 video transmission types 41 volume down hotkey, identifying 23 volume mute button 23 volume up hotkey, identifying 23 volume, adjusting 23 W webcam light, identifying 6, 23 webcam, identifying 6, 23 Windows applications key, identifying 3 Windows logo key, identifying 3 Windows, passwords set in 56 wireless antennas 8 Wireless Assistant software 11, 12 wireless controls button 11 HP Connection Manager 11 operating system 11 Wireless Assistant software 11 wireless function key 11 wireless icon 10 wireless light 11 wireless light, identifying 2 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 14 corporate WLAN connection 14 equipment needed 13 functional range 14 public WLAN connection 14 security 13 WLAN 7 WLAN device 10 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Index 73 writable media 43 WWAN device 15 74 Index Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | User Manual legal part | Users Manual | 1.86 MiB | / September 12 2009 |
Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Energy Star is a U.S. registered mark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Second Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 437312-002 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ..................................................................................................................................... 3 Products with wireless LAN devices .................................................................................... 3 Brazilian notice ..................................................................................................................................... 4 Wireless LAN certification markings .................................................................................... 4 Canadian notices .................................................................................................................................. 4 Avis Canadien ...................................................................................................................................... 5 European Union notices ....................................................................................................................... 5 Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices ...................................................................... 6 France ................................................................................................................. 6 Italy ...................................................................................................................... 6 Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices ......................................................................... 6 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................... 6 Germany ............................................................................................................. 6 Indian notice ......................................................................................................................................... 7 Japanese notices ................................................................................................................................. 7 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN certification markings .................................................................................... 7 Bluetooth devices ................................................................................................................ 9 Certification markings for Bluetooth devices ........................................................................ 9 Korean notice ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Singaporean wireless notice .............................................................................................................. 10 Taiwan notice ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Airline travel notice ............................................................................................................................. 10 Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 10 Energy Star compliance ..................................................................................................................... 11 Laser compliance ............................................................................................................................... 11 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 12 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 12 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 13 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................. 14 Canadian modem statements ............................................................................................ 20 Japanese modem statements ............................................................................................ 20 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 21 ENWW iii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Voice support .................................................................................................... 21 Power cord notice ............................................................................................................................... 22 Japanese power cord notice .............................................................................................. 22 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................... 22 2 Safety notices Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 23 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 23 Power cord notices ............................................................................................................................. 23 Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................... 24 3 Environmental notices Battery disposal .................................................................................................................................. 25 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ......................................................................................... 25 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ....................... 25 Chinese material content declarations ............................................................................................... 26 Japanese material content declaration ............................................................................................... 28 United States mercury disposal .......................................................................................................... 28 Perchlorate material - special handling may apply ............................................................................. 28 Index ................................................................................................................................................................. 29 iv ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device, such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, installed on the computer, open the Device Manager utility. In Windows Vista, follow these steps:
1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. In Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:
1. 2. Select Start > My Computer. If the left pane, select View System Information > Hardware tab > Device Manager. ENWW 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo
(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:
1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebooks. During normal operation of tablet PCs: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Tablet PC Tour user guide included with the computer. During normal operation of notebooks: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm
(8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Notebook Tour user guide included with the computer. CAUTION When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. ENWW Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Brazilian notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Unless the computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN radio or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN radio, the Brazilian certification mark is located on the bottom of the computer. Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:
The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:
Canadian notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Wireless operation is subject to 2 conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennae for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. For radio devices in the 5250- to 5350-MHz and 5470- to 5725-MHz bands, the maximum gain as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limit is noted below:
Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.6 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.6 dBi 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi For radio devices in the 5725- to 5825-MHz band, the maximum gain permitted, as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limits for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation, is noted below:
Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.8 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.8 dBi Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC EMC Directive 89/336/EEC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:
R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. The following CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany ENWW Avis Canadien 5 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
The following CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.
*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:
Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices France L'utilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis l'interieur d'un batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy E'necessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management (Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices Frequency availability for 802.11a or 802.11h wireless LAN is not currently harmonized throughout the European Union. For compliance requirements, users should verify compliance with their supplier, local HP office, or telecommunications authority. Ergonomics notice Germany Computers bearing the GS approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements when used in conjunction with docking bases, keyboards, and monitors that bear the GS approval mark. Computers in a stand-alone mode are not intended for continuous use in an office environment. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Indian notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning & Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. Japanese notices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:
ENWW Indian notice 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
The Intel PRO/Wireless 2915a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:
The Intel PRO/Wireless 3945a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:
The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:
The Broadcom 4311BG 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:
The Broadcom 4311AG 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:
The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:
The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:
8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:
Bluetooth devices Certification markings for Bluetooth devices The HP integrated module with Bluetooth has the certification mark below:
The HP integrated module with Bluetooth 2.0 has the certification mark below:
ENWW Japanese notices 9 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Korean notice Singaporean wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antenna during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Taiwan notice Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Battery notices CAUTION Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. For information about removing a battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Energy Star compliance Computers bearing the Energy Star logo are compliant with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA) Energy Star Computers Program 3.0. The EPA Energy Star logo does not imply endorsement by the EPA. As an Energy Star Partner, HP has determined that the product meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency. Laser compliance This product may be provided with a device containing a laser that is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with US FDA regulations and the IEC 60825-1. The product does not emit hazardous laser radiation. Each laser product complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated May 27, 2001; and with IEC 60825-1:1993/A2:2001. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:
Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. ENWW Energy Star compliance 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:
Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country in which the product is located. Selecting a country other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country selection is not made. If, when you select a country, a message appears that states that the country is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country and thus should not be used. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. ENWW Modem notices 13 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:
14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
ENWW Modem notices 15 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
ENWW Modem notices 17 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
18 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
ENWW Modem notices 19 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems AC'97 modem is below:
The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:
The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems HDA modem is below:
The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:
20 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:
a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. ENWW Modem notices 21 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japanese power cord notice Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 22 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
2 Safety notices Battery notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery;
short the external contacts on a battery; or dispose of a battery in fire or water. Do not expose a battery to temperatures above 60C (140F). WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Headset and earphone volume level notice Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in clause 7 of EN 50332-2. If a headset or earphones are shipped with this product, they are in compliance to EN 50332-1. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. ENWW Battery notices 23 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 24 Chapter 2 Safety notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Battery disposal WARNING! When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service, or the shop where you purchased the product. ENWW Battery disposal 25 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Chinese material content declarations The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products 26 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
ENWW Chinese material content declarations 27 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Japanese material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2005, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. United States mercury disposal This computer contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the computer display, which may require special handling when the computer has reached the end of its useful life. Because of environmental considerations, local authorities may regulate the disposal of the mercury. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www.eiae.org. Perchlorate material - special handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. 28 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Index Symbols/Numerics 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 A airline travel notice 10 B battery disposal notice 25 battery notice 10, 23 Brazilian notice 4 C Canadian modem statement 20 Canadian notices 4 Chinese Material Content Declarations 26 D Declaration of Conformity 3 disposal notices battery 25 equipment 25 mercury 28 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 25 Energy Star compliance 11 environmental notices 25 equipment disposal notice 25 ergonomics notice 6 European Union notices 5 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 ENWW France, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 G GS Notice 6 H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 23 I Indian notice 7 Italy, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 J Japanese material content declaration 28 Japanese modem statement 20 Japanese notice 7 Japanese power cord notice 22 K Korean notice 10 L laser safety notice 11 M Macrovision Corporation notice 22 mercury disposal notice 28 modem notices 12 modem statements Canadian 20 Japanese 20 New Zealand 21 U.S. 13 N New Zealand modem statement 21 notices airline travel 10 battery 10, 23, 25 Brazilian 4 Canadian 4 environmental 25 equipment disposal 25 ergonomics 6 European Union 5 Federal Communications Commission 2 headset and earphone volume level 23 Indian 7 Japanese 7 Japanese power cord 22 Korean 10 laser safety 11 Macrovision Corporation 22 mercury disposal 28 modem 12 perchlorate material 28 power cords 22, 23 Singaporean 10 Taiwan 10 travel 24 P power cord notice 22, 23 S Singaporean wireless notice 10 Index 29 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
T Taiwan notice 10 travel notice 24 U U.S. modem statement 13 V voice support 21 W wireless LAN devices 3 30 Index ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | User manual 1 of 2 | Users Manual | 81.97 KiB |
Regulatory Statement
(to be included in the portable notebook PCs with WLAN radios) 1. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. INFORMATION TO USER:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.
-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. CAUTION: (this only applicable to 5GHz device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Page 1 of 2 Regulatory Statement
(to be included in the portable notebook PCs with WLAN radios) If the module is installed in portable hosts, where the separation distance between radiating elements and the user is less than 20cm, additional equipment authorization procedure to address RF exposure compliance shall apply. If the module is installed with other transmitting devices which can transmit simultaneously with this device and antenna-to-antenna distance is less 20cm, assessing RF exposure compliance with multiple transmitters within a host device shall be performed based upon FCC requirements. 2. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. Caution: (this only applicable to UNII device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Page 2 of 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | User manual 2 of 2 | Users Manual | 3.23 MiB |
Computer User Guide Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. To obtain the latest information in the Computer User Guide, go to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/support. Copyright 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: September 2009 Document Part Number: 574399-001 Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). iii iv Safety warning notice Table of contents 1 Hardware features Identifying the hardware ....................................................................................................................... 1 Top components .................................................................................................................. 1 TouchPad ............................................................................................................ 1 Lights ................................................................................................................... 2 Buttons ................................................................................................................ 3 Keys .................................................................................................................... 4 Front components ................................................................................................................ 4 Right-side components ........................................................................................................ 5 Left-side components .......................................................................................................... 6 Display components ............................................................................................................ 7 Bottom components ............................................................................................................. 8 Wireless antennas ............................................................................................................... 9 Additional hardware components ...................................................................................... 10 Identifying the labels ........................................................................................................................... 10 2 Wireless and local area network Using wireless devices ....................................................................................................................... 13 Identifying wireless and network status icons .................................................................... 13 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................ 14 Using the wireless button ................................................................................................... 14 Using Wireless Assistant software (select models only) .................................................... 15 Using HP Connection Manager (select models only) ........................................................ 15 Using operating system controls ........................................................................................ 15 Using a WLAN .................................................................................................................................... 17 Setting up a WLAN ............................................................................................................ 17 Protecting your WLAN ....................................................................................................... 17 Connecting to a WLAN ...................................................................................................... 18 Roaming to another network .............................................................................................. 19 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) ............................................................................. 20 Inserting a SIM ................................................................................................................... 20 Removing a SIM ................................................................................................................ 21 Using Bluetooth wireless devices ....................................................................................................... 23 Bluetooth and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) ............................................................. 23 v Troubleshooting wireless connection problems ................................................................................. 24 Cannot connect to a WLAN ............................................................................................... 24 Cannot connect to a preferred WLAN network .................................................................. 25 Network icon for WLAN is not displayed ............................................................................ 25 Current WLAN network security codes are unavailable .................................................... 25 WLAN connection is very weak ......................................................................................... 26 Cannot connect to the wireless router ............................................................................... 26 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) .......................................................................................... 27 3 Multimedia Multimedia features ............................................................................................................................ 29 Identifying your multimedia components ........................................................................... 29 Adjusting the volume ......................................................................................................... 31 Multimedia software ........................................................................................................................... 32 Using preinstalled multimedia software ............................................................................. 32 Installing multimedia software from the Internet ................................................................ 32 Audio .................................................................................................................................................. 33 Connecting external audio devices .................................................................................... 33 Checking your audio functions ........................................................................................... 33 Video .................................................................................................................................................. 35 Connecting an external monitor or projector ...................................................................... 35 Connecting an HDMI device .............................................................................................. 35 Configuring audio for HDMI (select models only) .............................................. 36 Webcam ............................................................................................................................................. 37 4 Drives and external devices Drives ................................................................................................................................................. 40 Identifying installed drives .................................................................................................. 40 Handling drives .................................................................................................................. 40 Improving hard drive performance ..................................................................................... 41 Using Disk Defragmenter .................................................................................. 41 Using Disk Cleanup ........................................................................................... 41 Replacing the hard drive in the hard drive bay .................................................................. 41 Using external drives ......................................................................................................... 43 Connecting optional external drives .................................................................. 44 Sharing optical drives ........................................................................................................ 44 External devices ................................................................................................................................. 45 Using a USB device ........................................................................................................... 45 Connecting a USB device ................................................................................. 45 Removing a USB device ................................................................................... 45 Using Digital Media Slot cards ........................................................................................... 46 Inserting a digital card ....................................................................................... 46 Removing a digital card ..................................................................................... 47 vi 5 Memory modules 6 Pointing devices and keyboard Setting pointing device preferences ................................................................................................... 53 Using pointing devices ....................................................................................................................... 53 Using the TouchPad .......................................................................................................... 53 Connecting an external mouse .......................................................................................... 53 Using the keyboard ............................................................................................................................ 53 Using hotkeys .................................................................................................................... 53 Initiating Sleep ................................................................................................... 54 Switching the screen image .............................................................................. 55 Decreasing screen brightness ........................................................................... 55 Increasing screen brightness ............................................................................ 55 Initiating QuickLock ........................................................................................... 55 Muting speaker sound ....................................................................................... 56 Decreasing speaker volume .............................................................................. 56 Increasing speaker volume ............................................................................... 56 7 Power management Setting power options ......................................................................................................................... 57 Using power-saving states ................................................................................................. 57 Initiating and exiting Sleep ................................................................................ 57 Initiating and exiting Hibernation ....................................................................... 58 Using the battery meter ..................................................................................................... 58 Using power plans ............................................................................................................. 59 Viewing the current power plan ......................................................................... 59 Selecting a different power plan ........................................................................ 59 Customizing power plans .................................................................................. 59 Setting password protection on wakeup ............................................................................ 59 Using external AC power .................................................................................................................... 59 Connecting the AC adapter ............................................................................................... 60 Testing an AC adapter ....................................................................................................... 61 Using battery power ........................................................................................................................... 61 Finding battery information in Help and Support ............................................................... 62 Using Battery Check .......................................................................................................... 62 Displaying the remaining battery charge ........................................................................... 62 Inserting or removing the battery ....................................................................................... 62 Charging a battery ............................................................................................................. 63 Maximizing battery discharge time .................................................................................... 64 Managing low battery levels .............................................................................................. 64 Identifying low battery levels ............................................................................. 64 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................. 66 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ....... 66 vii Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available ........................................................................................... 66 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ........................................................................................... 66 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ....................................................................................... 66 Calibrating a battery ........................................................................................................... 66 Step 1: Fully charge the battery ........................................................................ 66 Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Sleep ............................................................. 67 Step 3: Discharge the battery ............................................................................ 67 Step 4: Fully recharge the battery ..................................................................... 69 Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Sleep .......................................................... 69 Conserving battery power .................................................................................................. 69 Storing a battery ................................................................................................................ 69 Disposing of a used battery ............................................................................................... 70 Shutting down the computer ............................................................................................................... 70 8 Security Protecting the computer ..................................................................................................................... 71 Using passwords ................................................................................................................................ 71 Setting passwords in Windows .......................................................................................... 72 Setting passwords in Setup Utility ..................................................................................... 72 Administrator password ..................................................................................... 73 Managing an administrator password ............................................... 73 Entering an administrator password ................................................. 73 Power-on password .......................................................................................... 73 Managing a power-on password ...................................................... 74 Entering a power-on password ......................................................... 74 Using antivirus software ..................................................................................................................... 75 Using firewall software ....................................................................................................................... 76 Installing critical updates .................................................................................................................... 77 9 Software updates Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 80 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................... 80 Downloading a BIOS update ............................................................................................. 80 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................... 82 10 Setup Utility Starting Setup Utility ........................................................................................................................... 83 Using Setup Utility .............................................................................................................................. 83 Changing the language of Setup Utility ............................................................................. 83 Navigating and selecting in Setup Utility ............................................................................ 83 viii Displaying system information ........................................................................................... 84 Restoring default settings in Setup Utility .......................................................................... 84 Exiting Setup Utility ............................................................................................................ 84 Setup Utility menus ............................................................................................................................ 85 Main menu ......................................................................................................................... 85 Security menu .................................................................................................................... 85 System Configuration menu .............................................................................................. 85 Diagnostics menu .............................................................................................................. 86 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 87 ix x 1 Hardware features Identifying the hardware Components included with the computer may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features on most computer models. To see a list of hardware installed in the computer:
1. 2. Select Start > Control panel > System and Security. In the System area, click Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. Top components TouchPad Component
(1)
(2)
(3) TouchPad*
Left TouchPad button*
Right TouchPad button*
Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Identifying the hardware 1
(4) TouchPad scroll zone Scrolls up or down.
*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Devices and Printers. Then, right-click the device representing your computer, and select Mouse. Lights Component
(1)
(2)
(3) Caps lock light Power light Wireless light Description On: Caps lock is on. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. 2 Chapter 1 Hardware features Buttons Component
(1) Power button*
(2) Wireless button Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. Turns the wireless feature on or off but does not create a wireless connection. NOTE: To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up.
*This table describes factory settings. For information about changing factory settings, refer to the user guides located in Help and Support. Identifying the hardware 3 Keys Component Description
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Function keys Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. Front components Component
(1) Speakers (2) Description Produce sound. 4 Chapter 1 Hardware features Component
(2) Battery light
(3) Drive light Right-side components Description On: A battery is charging. Blinking: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking: The hard drive or flash drive is being accessed. Component Description
(1) Digital Media Slot Supports the following optional digital card formats:
(2) Audio-out (headphone) jack/Audio-in (microphone) jack Memory Stick (MS) Memory Stick Pro (MS/Pro) MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card xD-Picture card Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or television audio. Also connects an optional headset microphone. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. The audio component cable must have a 4-conductor connector.
(3) USB ports (2) Connect optional USB devices. Identifying the hardware 5 Component
(4)
(5) External monitor port RJ-45 (network) jack Description Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. Connects a network cable. Left-side components Component Description
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. Power connector Connects an AC adapter. Vent USB port HDMI port Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connects an optional USB device. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, or any compatible digital or audio component. NOTE: Depending on your computer model, the computer may include an HDMI port or a USB port at this location. 6 Chapter 1 Hardware features Display components Component Description
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4) Internal display switch Webcam light Webcam Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. On: The webcam is in use. Captures still photographs and videos. NOTE: To capture videos, you must install additional webcam software. Internal microphone Records sound. Identifying the hardware 7 Bottom components Component Description Battery release latches (2) Release the battery from the battery bay.
(1)
(2)
(3) Battery bay Vents (4)
(4) Hard drive bay 8 Chapter 1 Hardware features Holds the battery. Enable airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Contains the hard drive, the wireless LAN module slot, and the memory module slot. CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system, replace the wireless module only with a wireless module authorized for use in the computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country or region. If you replace the module and then receive a warning message, remove the module to restore computer functionality, and then contact technical support through Help and Support. Wireless antennas Component Description
(1)
(2) WLAN antennas (2)*
WWAN antennas (2) (select models only)*
Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs). Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide-area networks (WWANs).
*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. To see wireless regulatory notices, refer to the section of the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. These notices are located in Help and Support. Identifying the hardware 9 Additional hardware components Component
(1)
(2)
(3) Power cord*
Battery*
AC adapter Description Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power. Converts AC power to DC power.
*Batteries and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. Identifying the labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service tagProvides important information including the following:
Product name (1). This is the product name affixed to the front of your computer. Serial number (s/n) (2). This is an alphanumeric identifier that is unique to each product. Part Number/Product number (p/n) (3). This number provides specific information about the hardware components of the product. The part number helps a service technician to determine what components and parts are needed. 10 Chapter 1 Hardware features Model description (4). This is the alphanumeric identifier you use to locate documents, drivers, and support for your computer. Warranty period (5). This number describes the duration (in years) of the warranty period for this computer. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Microsoft Certificate of AuthenticityContains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer, including the following:
Information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The serial number of your HP Mobile Broadband Module. The regulatory label is affixed inside the battery bay. Identifying the labels 11 12 Chapter 1 Hardware features 2 Wireless and local area network Using wireless devices Wireless technology transfers data across radio waves instead of wires. Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:
Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, each mobile wireless device communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband ModuleA wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that provides access to information wherever mobile network operator service is available. In a WWAN, each mobile device communicates to a mobile network operators base station. Mobile network operators install networks of base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close together typically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. Computers with WLAN devices support one or more of the following IEEE industry standards:
802.11b, the first popular standard, supports data rates of up to 11 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. 802.11g supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. An 802.11g WLAN device is backward compatible with 802.11b devices, so they can operate on the same network. 802.11a supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 5 GHz. NOTE: 802.11a is not compatible with 802.11b and 802.11g. 802.11n supports data rates of up to 450 Mbps and may operate at 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz, making it backward compatible with 802.11a, b, and g. For more information on wireless technology, refer to the information and Web site links provided in Help and Support. Identifying wireless and network status icons Icon Name Description Using wireless devices 13 Wireless (connected) Wireless (disconnected) HP Connection Manager Wired network (connected) Wired network (disabled/disconnected) Network (disabled/disconnected) Network (connected) Network (disconnected) Identifies the location of the wireless light and the wireless function key on the computer. Also identifies the Wireless Assistant software on the computer and indicates that one or more of the wireless devices are on. Identifies the Wireless Assistant software on the computer and indicates that all of the wireless devices are off. Opens HP Connection Manager, which enables you to create a connection with an HP Mobile Broadband device (select models only). Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed and one or more network devices are connected to the network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, all network devices or all wireless devices are disabled in Windows Control Panel, and no network devices are connected to a wired network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, no wireless connections are available or all wireless network devices are disabled by the wireless button or Wireless Assistant, and no network devices are connected to a wired network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, one or more network devices are connected to a wireless network, and one or more network devices are connected to a wired network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed and wireless connections are available, but no network devices are connected to a wired or wireless network. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using these features:
Wireless button or wireless switch Wireless Assistant software (select models only) HP Connection Manager software (select models only) Operating system controls Using the wireless button The computer has a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights, depending on the model. All of the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory, so the wireless light is on (blue) when you turn on the computer. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. If the wireless light is blue, at least one wireless device is on. If the wireless light is off, all wireless devices are off. 14 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless button to turn on or turn off the wireless devices simultaneously. Individual wireless devices can be controlled through Wireless Assistant software (select models only). Using Wireless Assistant software (select models only) A wireless device can be turned on or off using the Wireless Assistant software. If a wireless device is disabled in Setup Utility, it must be reenabled in Setup Utility before it can be turned on or off using Wireless Assistant. NOTE: Enabling or turning on a wireless device does not automatically connect the computer to a network or a Bluetooth-enabled device. To view the state of the wireless devices, click the Show hidden icons icon, the arrow at the left of the notification area, and position the mouse pointer over the wireless icon. If the wireless icon is not displayed in the notification area, complete the following steps to change Wireless Assistant properties:
1. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Windows Mobility Center. 2. Click the wireless icon in the Wireless Assistant tile, which is located in the bottom row of Windows Mobility Center. 3. Click Properties. 4. Select the check box next to HP Wireless Assistant icon in notification area. 5. Click Apply. 6. Click Close. For more information, refer to the Wireless Assistant software Help:
1. Open Wireless Assistant by clicking the wireless icon in Windows Mobility Center. 2. Click the Help button. Using HP Connection Manager (select models only) You can use HP Connection Manager to connect to WWANs using the HP Mobile Broadband device in your computer (select models only). To start Connection Manager, click the Connection Manager icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or Select Start > All Programs > HP Connection Manager > HP Connection Manager. For more details about using Connection Manager, refer to the Connection Manager software Help. Using operating system controls Some operating systems also offer a way to manage integrated wireless devices and the wireless connection. For example, Windows provides the Network and Sharing Center that allows you to set up Using wireless devices 15 a connection or network, connect to a network, manage wireless networks, and diagnose and repair network problems. To access the Network and Sharing Center, select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet >
Network and Sharing Center. For more information, select Start > Help and Support. 16 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Using a WLAN With a WLAN device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other devices and accessories that are linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. NOTE: The terms wireless router and wireless access point are often used interchangeably. A large-scale WLAN, such as a corporate or public WLAN, typically uses wireless access points that can accommodate a large number of devices and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which allows several wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without requiring additional pieces of hardware or software. To use the WLAN device in your computer, you must connect to a WLAN infrastructure (provided through a service provider or a public or corporate network). Setting up a WLAN To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:
A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider (ISP) A wireless router (purchased separately) (2) The computer, equipped with a wireless device (3) The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. As your network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. For help in setting up your WLAN, refer to the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Protecting your WLAN Because the WLAN standard was designed with only limited security capabilitiesbasically to foil casual eavesdropping rather than more powerful forms of attackit is essential to understand that WLANs are vulnerable to well-known and well-documented security weaknesses. WLANs in public areas, or hotspots, like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. New technologies are being developed by wireless manufacturers and hotspot service providers that make the public environment more secure and anonymous. If you are concerned about the security of your computer in a hotspot, limit your network activities to noncritical e-mail and basic Internet surfing. Using a WLAN 17 When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. The common security levels are Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)-
Personal and Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). Because wireless radio signals travel outside the network, other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals and either connect to your network
(uninvited) or capture information being sent across it. However, you can take precautions to protect your WLAN:
Use a wireless transmitter with built-in security. Many wireless base stations, gateways, or routers provide built-in security features such as wireless security protocols and firewalls. With the correct wireless transmitter, you can protect your network from the most common wireless security risks. Work behind a firewall. A firewall is a barrier that checks both data and requests for data that are sent to your network, and discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in many varieties, both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types. Use wireless encryption. A variety of sophisticated encryption protocols is available for your WLAN. Find the solution that works best for your network security:
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). is a wireless security protocol that encodes or encrypts all network data before it is transmitted using a WEP key. Usually, you can allow the network to assign the WEP key. Alternatively, you can set up your own key, generate a different key, or choose other advanced options. Without the correct key, others are not able to use the WLAN. WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access)., like WEP, uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt data that is transmitted over the network. However, instead of using one static security key for encryptions as WEP does, WPA uses temporal key integrity protocol (TKIP) to dynamically generate a new key for every packet. It also generates different sets of keys for each computer on the network. Connecting to a WLAN To connect to the WLAN, follow these steps:
1. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. If it is on, the wireless light is blue. If the wireless light is amber, press the wireless button. 2. Click the network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 3. Select your WLAN from the list. 4. Click Connect. If the network is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a network security key, which is a security code. Type the code, and then click OK to complete the connection. NOTE:
If no WLANs are listed, you are out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE:
If you do not see the network you want to connect to, click Open Network and Sharing Center, and then click Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed. You can choose to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. 18 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. More information about using a WLAN is available through the following resources:
Information from your ISP and the manufacturer's instructions included with your wireless router and other WLAN equipment Information and Web site links provided in Help and Support For a list of public WLANs near you, contact your ISP or search the Web. Web sites that list public WLANs include Cisco Internet Mobile Office Wireless Locations, Hotspotlist, and Geektools. Check with each public WLAN location for cost and connection requirements. Roaming to another network When you move your computer within range of another WLAN, Windows attempts to connect to that network. If the attempt is successful, your computer is automatically connected to the new network. If Windows does not recognize the new network, follow the same procedure you used initially to connect to your WLAN. Using a WLAN 19 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) HP Mobile Broadband enables your computer to use wireless wide area networks (WWANs) to access the Internet from more places and over larger areas than it can by using WLANs. Using HP Mobile Broadband requires a network service provider (called a mobile network operator), which in most cases is a mobile phone network operator. Coverage for HP Mobile Broadband is similar to mobile phone voice coverage. When used with mobile network operator service, HP Mobile Broadband gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road or outside the range of Wi-Fi hotspots. HP Mobile Broadband supports the following technologies:
HSPA (High Speed Packet Access), which provides access to networks based on the Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) telecommunications standard. EV-DO (Evolution Data Optimized), which provides access to networks based on the code division multiple access (CDMA) telecommunications standard. You may need the HP Mobile Broadband Module serial number to activate mobile broadband service. The serial number is printed on a label inside the battery bay of your computer. Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM). A SIM contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM that is preinstalled in the battery bay. If the SIM is not preinstalled, it may be included with the HP Mobile Broadband information provided with your computer, or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information on inserting and removing the SIM, refer to the Inserting a SIM and Removing a SIM sections in this chapter. For information on HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, refer to the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. For additional information, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/mobilebroadband (US only). Inserting a SIM To insert a SIM:
1. Shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 6. Remove the battery. 20 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network CAUTION: When inserting a SIM, position the card with the slanted corner as shown in the illustration. If a SIM is inserted backwards or upside down, the battery may not snap into place properly and could damage the SIM and the SIM connector. To prevent damage to the connectors, use minimal force when inserting a SIM. 7. Insert the SIM into the SIM slot, and gently push the SIM into the slot until it is firmly seated. 8. Replace the battery. NOTE: HP Mobile Broadband is disabled if the battery is not replaced. 9. Reconnect external power. 10. Reconnect external devices. 11. Turn on the computer. Removing a SIM To remove a SIM:
1. Shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 6. Remove the battery. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) 21 7. Press in on the SIM (1), and then remove it from the slot (2). 8. Replace the battery. 9. Reconnect external power. 10. Reconnect external devices. 11. Turn on the computer. 22 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Using Bluetooth wireless devices A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:
Computers (desktop, notebook, PDA) Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a personal area network
(PAN) of Bluetooth devices. For information on configuring and using Bluetooth devices, refer to the Bluetooth software Help. Bluetooth and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) HP does not recommend setting up one computer with Bluetooth as a host and using it as a gateway through which other computers may connect to the Internet. When two or more computers are connected using Bluetooth, and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) is enabled on one of the computers, the other computers may not be able to connect to the Internet using the Bluetooth network. The strength of Bluetooth is in synchronizing information transfers between your computer and wireless devices including cellular phones, printers, cameras, and PDAs. The inability to consistently connect two or more computers to share the Internet through Bluetooth is a limitation of Bluetooth and the Windows operating system. Using Bluetooth wireless devices 23 Troubleshooting wireless connection problems Some possible causes for wireless connection problems include the following:
Network configuration (SSID or security) has been changed. Wireless device is not installed correctly or has been disabled. Wireless device or router hardware has failed. Wireless device encountered interference from other devices. NOTE: Wireless networking devices are included with select computer models only. If wireless networking is not listed in the feature list on the side of the original computer package, you may add wireless networking capability to the computer by purchasing a wireless networking device. Before working your way through the sequence of possible solutions to your network connection problem, be sure that device drivers are installed for all wireless devices. Use the procedures in this chapter to diagnose and repair a computer that does not connect to the network you want to use. Cannot connect to a WLAN If you have a problem connecting to a WLAN, confirm that the integrated WLAN device is properly installed on your computer:
NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. 1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security. In the System area, click Device Manager. 3. Click the arrow next to Network adapters to expand the list and show all adapters. 4. Identify the WLAN device from the Network adapters list. The listing for a WLAN device may include the terms wireless, wireless LAN, WLAN, Wi-Fi, or 802.11. If no WLAN device is listed, either your computer does not have an integrated WLAN device, or the driver of the WLAN device is not properly installed. For more information on troubleshooting WLANs, refer to the Web site links provided in Help and Support. 24 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Cannot connect to a preferred WLAN network Windows can automatically repair a corrupted WLAN connection:
If there is a network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, right-click the icon, and then click Troubleshoot problems. Windows resets your network device and attempts to reconnect to one of the preferred networks. If there is no network icon in the notification area, follow these steps:
1. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 2. Click Troubleshoot problems and select the network you wish to repair. Network icon for WLAN is not displayed If the network icon is not displayed in the notification area after you configure the WLAN, the software driver is either missing or corrupted. A Windows Device not Found error message may also be displayed. The driver must be reinstalled. Get the latest version of the WLAN computer software and drivers for your computer from the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com. NOTE:
site for the latest software. If the WLAN device you are using was purchased separately, consult the manufacturer's Web To get the latest version of the WLAN computer software for your computer, follow these steps:
1. Open your Internet browser and go to http://www.hp.com/support. 2. Select your country or region. 3. Click the option for software and driver downloads, and then type your computer model number in the search box. 4. Press enter, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Current WLAN network security codes are unavailable If you are prompted for a network key or a name (SSID) when connecting to a WLAN, the network is protected by security. You must have the current codes to make a connection on a secure network. The SSID and network key are alphanumeric codes that identify your computer to the network. For a network connected to your personal wireless router, review the router user guide for instructions on setting up the same codes on both the router and the WLAN device. For a private network, such as a network in an office or at a public Internet chat room, contact the network administrator to obtain the codes, and then enter the codes when prompted to do so. Some networks change the SSID or network keys used in their routers or access points on a regular basis to improve security. You must change the corresponding code in your computer accordingly. Troubleshooting wireless connection problems 25 If you are provided with new wireless network keys and SSID for a network, and if you have previously connected to that network, follow the steps below to connect to the network:
1. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 2. Click Manage wireless networks in the left panel. A list showing the available WLANs is displayed. If you are in a hotspot where several WLANs are active, several are displayed. 3. Select the network in the list, right-click the network, and then click Properties. NOTE:
the router or access point is operating. If the network you want is not listed, check with the network administrator to be sure that 4. Click the Security tab and enter the correct wireless encryption data into the Network security key box. 5. Click OK to save these settings. WLAN connection is very weak If the connection is very weak, or if your computer cannot make a connection to a WLAN, minimize interference from other devices, as follows:
Move your computer closer to the wireless router or access point. Temporarily disconnect devices such as a microwave, cordless phone, or cellular phone to be sure that other devices are not interfering. If the connection does not improve, try forcing the device to reestablish all connection values:
1. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 2. Click Manage wireless networks in the left panel. A list showing the available WLANs is displayed. If you are in a hotspot where several WLANs are active, several are displayed. 3. Click a network, and then click Remove. Cannot connect to the wireless router If you are trying to connect to the wireless router and are unsuccessful, reset the wireless router by removing power from the router for 10 to 15 seconds. If the computer still cannot make a connection to a WLAN, restart the wireless router. For details, refer to the router manufacturer's instructions. 26 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Connecting to a local area network (LAN) Connecting to a local area network (LAN) requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 network cable (purchased separately). If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (1), which prevents interference from TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable (2) toward the computer. To connect the network cable:
WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a modem cable or telephone cable into an RJ-45 (network) jack. 1. 2. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. Plug the other end of the cable into a network wall jack (2). Connecting to a local area network (LAN) 27 28 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network 3 Multimedia Multimedia features Your computer includes multimedia features that allow you to listen to music, watch movies, and view pictures. Your computer may include the following multimedia components:
Integrated speakers for listening to music Integrated microphone for recording your own audio Integrated webcam that allows you to capture photographs and videos Preinstalled multimedia software that allows you to play and manage your music, movies, and pictures NOTE: Your computer may not include all of the components listed. The following sections explain how to identify and use the multimedia components included with your computer. Identifying your multimedia components The following illustration and table describe the multimedia features of the computer. Multimedia features 29 Component
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6) Webcam light Webcam Description On: The webcam is in use. Captures still photographs and videos. NOTE: To capture videos, you must install additional webcam software. Internal microphone Records sound. Audio-out (headphone) jack/Audio-in
(microphone) jack Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or television audio. Also connects an optional headset microphone. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. The audio component must have a 4-conductor connector. Speakers (2) Produce sound. Volume mute hotkey Mutes speaker sound when pressed in combination with the fn key. 30 Chapter 3 Multimedia Component
(7)
(8) Volume down hotkey Volume up hotkey Description Decreases speaker sound when pressed in combination with the fn key. Increases speaker sound when pressed in combination with the fn key. Adjusting the volume You can adjust the volume using the following controls:
computer volume hotkeyA combination of the fn key (1) and either the f8 (2), f10 (3), or f11 (4) function key:
To mute or restore volume, press fn+f8. To decrease volume, press fn+f10. To increase volume, press fn+f11. Windows volume control:
a. Click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. b. Increase or decrease the volume by moving the slider up or down. Click the Mute Speakers icon to mute the volume. or a. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, and then click Open Volume Mixer. b. In the Volume Control column, you can increase or decrease the volume by moving the slider up or down. You can also mute the volume by clicking the Mute Speakers icon. Multimedia features 31 If the Speakers icon is not displayed in the notification area, follow these steps to add it:
a. Right-click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left side of the notification area. b. Click Customize notification icons. c. Under Behaviors, select Show icon and notifications for the Volume icon. d. Click OK. Program volume control:
Volume can also be adjusted within some programs. Multimedia software Your computer includes preinstalled multimedia software that allows you to play music, watch movies, and view pictures. Using preinstalled multimedia software To locate other preinstalled multimedia software:
Select Start > All Programs, and then open the multimedia program you want to use. For example, if you want to use Windows Media Player (select models only), click Windows Media Player. NOTE: Some programs may be located in subfolders. Installing multimedia software from the Internet
To install multimedia software from the Internet, go to the software manufacturers Web site and follow the instructions. NOTE: Software downloaded from the Internet may contain viruses. Refer to the Security chapter for more information. 32 Chapter 3 Multimedia Audio Your computer has a variety of audio features that allow you to:
Play music using your computer speakers and/or connected external speakers. Record sound using the internal microphone or an optional external headset microphone. Download music from the Internet. Create multimedia presentations using audio and images. Transmit sound and images with instant messaging programs. Connecting external audio devices WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To connect external devices such as external speakers, headphones, or a headset microphone, refer to the information provided with the device. For best results, remember the following tips:
Be sure that the device cable has a 4-conductor connector that supports both audio-out
(headphone) and audio-in (microphone). Be sure that the device cable is securely connected to the correct jack on your computer. (Cable connectors are normally color-coded to match the corresponding jacks on the computer.) Be sure to install any drivers required by the external device. NOTE: A driver is a required program that acts like a translator between the device and the programs that use the device. Checking your audio functions To check the system sound on your computer, follow these steps:
1. Select Start > Control Panel. 2. Click Hardware and Sound. 3. Click Sound. 4. When the Sound and Audio Device Properties window opens, click the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, select any sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and click the arrow button to check the sound. You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. To check the record functions of the computer, follow these steps:
1. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Sound Recorder. 2. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. Save the file to your desktop. 3. Open a multimedia program and play back the sound. Audio 33 NOTE: For best results when recording, speak directly into the microphone and record sound in a setting free of background noise. To confirm or change the audio settings on your computer, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Sound. 34 Chapter 3 Multimedia Video Your computer enables you to use a variety of video features:
Watch movies Play games over the Internet Edit pictures and video to create presentations Connect external video devices Connecting an external monitor or projector Use a VGA cable (purchased separately) to connect an external display, such as a monitor or projector, to the external monitor port on the computer. To connect an external monitor or projector:
1. Connect the optional VGA cable to the external monitor port on the computer. 2. Connect the external monitor or projector to the other end of the cable. If a properly connected external monitor or projector does not display a screen image, press NOTE:
fn+f2 to transfer the image to the external display. Repeatedly pressing fn+f2 alternates the screen image between the external display and the computer. Connecting an HDMI device The computer includes an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) port. The HDMI port connects the computer to an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, or any compatible digital or audio component. NOTE: To transmit video signals through the HDMI port, you need an HDMI cable (purchased separately). The computer can support one HDMI device connected to the HDMI port, while simultaneously supporting an image on the computer display or any other supported external display. Video 35 To connect a video or audio device to the HDMI port:
1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the video device, according to the device manufacturers instructions. 3. Press fn+f2 on the computer to switch the image between the display devices connected to the computer. Configuring audio for HDMI (select models only) To configure HDMI audio, first connect an audio or video device, such as a high-definition TV, to the HDMI port on your computer. Then configure the default audio playback device as follows:
1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click either Digital Output or Digital Output Device (HDMI). 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. To return audio to the computer speakers, follow these steps:
1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. 36 Chapter 3 Multimedia Webcam Your computer includes an integrated webcam, located at the top of the display. The webcam is an input device that allows you to capture and share video. To acccess the webcam:
1. Select Start > All programs > ArcSoft WebCam Companion 3 > WebCam Companion 3. 2. Click Capture > Take pictures. NOTE: The picture is automatically saved in the My Documents folder. Webcam 37 38 Chapter 3 Multimedia 4 Drives and external devices 39 Drives Identifying installed drives Your computer includes a hard drive (with a rotating disc) or a solid state-drive (SSD) with solid-state memory. Because an SSD has no moving parts, it does not generate as much heat as a hard drive. To view the drives installed on the computer, select Start > Computer. Handling drives Drives are fragile computer components that must be handled with care. Refer to the following cautions before handling drives. Additional cautions are included with the procedures to which they apply. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:
Before you move a computer that is connected to an external hard drive, initiate Sleep and allow the screen to clear, or properly disconnect the external hard drive. Before handling a drive, discharge static electricity by touching the unpainted metal surface of the drive. Do not touch the connector pins on a removable drive or on the computer. Handle a drive carefully; do not drop a drive or place items on it. Before removing or inserting a drive, shut down the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation, turn the computer on and then shut it down through the operating system. Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive into a drive bay. Do not type on the keyboard or move the computer while the optical drive (select models only) is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to vibration. When the battery is the only source of power, be sure that the battery is sufficiently charged before writing to media. Avoid exposing a drive to temperature or humidity extremes. Avoid exposing a drive to liquids. Do not spray the drive with cleaning products. Remove media from a drive before removing the drive from the drive bay, or traveling with, shipping, or storing a drive. If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-
through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, such as conveyor belts, use X-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a drive. 40 Chapter 4 Drives and external devices Improving hard drive performance Using Disk Defragmenter As you use the computer, files on the hard drive become fragmented. Disk Defragmenter consolidates the fragmented files and folders on the hard drive so that the system can run more efficiently. To run Disk Defragmenter:
1. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Defragmenter. 2. Click Defragment now. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing applications, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Disk Cleanup searches the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer to run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:
1. 2. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. Replacing the hard drive in the hard drive bay CAUTION: To prevent information loss or an unresponsive system:
Shut down the computer before removing the hard drive from the hard drive bay. Do not remove the hard drive while the computer is on, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. To remove the hard drive:
1. 2. Save your work. Shut down the computer and close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. 6. Remove the battery from the computer. 7. With the hard drive bay toward you, loosen the 2 hard drive cover screws (1). Drives 41 8. Lift the hard drive cover away from the computer (2). 9. Disconnect the hard drive cable (1) that secures the hard drive to the computer. 10. Pull the hard drive tab (2) up and lift the hard drive (3) out of the hard drive bay. To install a hard drive:
1. Grasp the hard drive tab (1) and insert the hard drive (2) into the hard drive bay, until the rubber stops slide into place. 42 Chapter 4 Drives and external devices 2. Reconnect the hard drive cable (3). 3. 4. Align the tabs on the hard drive cover with the notches on the computer, and then close the cover
(1). Tighten the 2 hard drive cover screws (2). Using external drives Removable external drives expand your options for storing and accessing information. USB drives include the following types:
1.44-megabyte diskette drive Hard drive module (a hard drive with an adapter attached) DVD-ROM Drive DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive DVDRW and CD-RW Combo Drive Drives 43 DVDRW and CD-RW SuperMulti Double-Layer Combo Drive DVDRW and CD-RW SuperMulti Double-Layer Combo Drive with LightScribe Blu-ray ROM DVDR/RW SuperMulti DL Drive Blu-ray ROM with LightScribe DVDR/RW SuperMulti DL Drive HD DVD drive NOTE: For more information about required software and drivers, or to learn which computer port to use, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. To connect an external drive to the computer:
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the equipment when connecting a powered drive, be sure that the AC power cord is unplugged. 1. Connect the drive to the computer. 2. If you are connecting a powered drive, plug the drive power cord into a grounded AC outlet. To disconnect a powered drive, disconnect it from the computer, and then unplug the AC power cord. Connecting optional external drives NOTE: For more information about required software and drivers, or to learn which computer port to use, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. To connect an external drive to the computer:
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the equipment when connecting a powered drive, be sure that the drive is turned off and the AC power cord is unplugged. 1. Connect the drive to the computer. 2. 3. If you are connecting a powered drive, plug the drive power cord into a grounded AC outlet. Turn on the drive. To disconnect an unpowered external drive, turn off the drive, and then disconnect it from the computer. To disconnect a powered external drive, turn off the drive, disconnect it from the computer, and then unplug the AC power cord. Sharing optical drives Although your computer does not have an installed optical drive, you can easily access software, as well as install applications and access data, by sharing an optical drive from another computer that has an optical drive and is on the same wired or wireless network. Sharing drives is a feature of the Windows operating system that allows a drive on another computer to be made available for other people to use on a network. NOTE: For information on setting up a home network and sharing a drive, refer to Help and Support. NOTE: Some discs, such as DVD movies and game discs, may be copy-protected and therefore unusable through DVD or CD sharing. 44 Chapter 4 Drives and external devices External devices Using a USB device Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a hardware interface that can be used to connect an optional external device, such as a USB keyboard, mouse, drive, printer, scanner, or hub. Devices can be connected to the system, an optional docking device, or an optional expansion product. Some USB devices may require additional support software, which is usually included with the device. For more information about device-specific software, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. The computer has 3 or 4 USB ports, which support USB 1.0, USB 1.1, and USB 2.0 devices. An optional USB hub, optional docking device, or an optional expansion product provides additional USB ports that can be used with the computer. Connecting a USB device CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, use minimal force to connect a USB device.
To connect a USB device to the computer, connect the USB cable for the device to the USB port. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected. NOTE: When you connect a USB device, you may see a message in the notification area to let you know that the device is recognized by the system. Removing a USB device CAUTION: To prevent loss of information or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the USB device. CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, do not pull on the cable to remove the USB device. External devices 45 To remove a USB device:
1. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon, click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left of in the notification area. 2. Click the name of the device in the list. NOTE: You are informed that it is safe to remove the hardware device. 3. Remove the device. Using Digital Media Slot cards Optional digital cards provide secure data storage and convenient data sharing. These cards are often used with digital mediaequipped cameras and PDAs as well as with other computers. The Digital Media Slot supports the following digital card formats:
Memory Stick (MS) Memory Stick Pro (MS/Pro) MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card Secure Digital High Capacity (SDHC) Memory Card xD-Picture Card (XD) xD-Picture Card (XD) Type H xD-Picture Card (XD) Type M Inserting a digital card CAUTION: To avoid damaging the digital card or the computer, do not insert any type of adapter into the Digital Media Slot. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the digital card connectors, use minimal force to insert a digital card. 1. Hold the digital card label-side up, with the connectors facing the computer. 46 Chapter 4 Drives and external devices 2. Insert the card into the Digital Media Slot, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected, and a menu of options may be displayed. Removing a digital card CAUTION: To prevent loss of data or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the digital card. 1. Save your information and close all programs associated with the digital card. NOTE: To stop a data transfer, click Cancel in the operating system Copying window. 2. To remove a digital card:
a. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon, click the Show Hidden Icons icon (the arrow at the left of the notification area). b. Click the name of the digital card in the list. NOTE: You are informed that it is safe to remove the hardware device. c. Click Stop, and then click OK. 3. Press in on the digital card (1), and then remove the card from the slot (2). External devices 47 48 Chapter 4 Drives and external devices 5 Memory modules The computer has one memory module slot, which is located inside the hard drive bay. The memory capacity of the computer can be upgraded by replacing the existing memory module. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock and damage to the equipment, unplug the power cord and remove all batteries before installing a memory module. CAUTION: Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage electronic components. Before beginning any procedure, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. To replace a memory module:
1. 2. Save your work. Shut down the computer and close the display. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. 6. Remove the battery from the computer. 7. Using a small Phillips screwdriver, loosen the 2 hard drive cover screws (1). 49 8. Lift the hard drive cover (2) away from the computer. 9. Remove the existing memory module:
a. Pull away the retention clips (1) on each side of the memory module. The memory module tilts up. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module. b. Grasp the edge of the memory module (2), and gently pull the module out of the memory module slot. To protect a memory module after removal, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 10. Insert a new memory module:
50 Chapter 5 Memory modules CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module, and do not bend the memory module. a. Align the notched edge (1) of the memory module with the tab in the memory module slot. b. With the memory module at a 45-degree angle from the surface of the hard drive bay, press the module (2) into the memory module slot until it is seated. c. Gently press the memory module (3) down, applying pressure to both the left and right edges of the memory module, until the retention clips snap into place. 11. Align the tabs on the hard drive cover with the notches on the computer (1), and then close the cover (2). 12. Tighten the 2 hard drive cover screws (3). 51 13. Replace the battery. 14. Turn the computer right-side up, and then reconnect external power and external devices. 15. Turn on the computer. 52 Chapter 5 Memory modules 6 Pointing devices and keyboard Setting pointing device preferences To access Mouse Properties, select Start > Devices and Printers. Then, right-click the device representing your computer, and select Mouse Use Mouse Properties in Windows to customize settings for pointing devices, such as button configuration, click speed, and pointer options. Using pointing devices Using the TouchPad To move the pointer, slide your finger across the TouchPad surface in the direction you want the pointer to go. Use the TouchPad buttons like the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To scroll up and down using the TouchPad vertical scroll zone, slide your finger up or down over the lines. NOTE:
If you are using the TouchPad to move the pointer, you must lift your finger off the TouchPad before moving it to the scroll zone. Simply sliding your finger from the TouchPad to the scroll zone will not activate the scrolling function. Connecting an external mouse You can connect an external USB mouse to the computer using one of the USB ports on the computer. Using the keyboard Using hotkeys Hotkeys are combinations of the fn key (1) and one of the function keys (2). The icons on the f1 through f4, and f6, f8, f10, and f11 keys represent the hotkey functions. Hotkey functions and procedures are discussed in the following sections. Setting pointing device preferences 53 Function Initiate Sleep. Switch the image. Decrease screen brightness. Increase screen brightness. Initiate QuickLock. Mute or restore speaker sound. Decrease device volume. Increase device volume. Hotkey fn+f1 fn+f2 fn+f3 fn+f4 fn+f6 fn+f8 fn+f10 fn+f11 To use a hotkey command on the device keyboard, follow either of these steps:
Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the hotkey command. or Press and hold down the fn key, briefly press the second key of the hotkey command, and then release both keys at the same time. Initiating Sleep CAUTION: To reduce the risk of information loss, save your work before initiating Sleep. Press fn+f1 to initiate Sleep. When Sleep is initiated, your information is stored in memory, the screen is cleared, and power is conserved. While the device is in the Sleep state, the power light blinks. 54 Chapter 6 Pointing devices and keyboard The device must be on before you can initiate Sleep. If a critical battery level occurs while the device is in the Sleep state, the device initiates CAUTION:
Hibernation and the information stored in memory is saved to the hard drive. The factory setting for critical battery action is Hibernate, but this setting can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. To exit Sleep, briefly press the power button. The function of the fn+f1 hotkey can be changed. For example, you can set the fn+f1 hotkey to initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep. NOTE:
hotkey. In all Windows operating system windows, references to the sleep button apply to the fn+f1 Switching the screen image Press fn+f2 to switch the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, pressing fn+f2 alternates the screen image from computer display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. NOTE: You must use a VGA cable (purchased separately) to connect an external display, such as a monitor or projector, to the external monitor port on the computer. Most external monitors receive video information from the computer using the external VGA video standard. The fn+f2 hotkey can also alternate images among other devices receiving video information from the computer. The following video transmission types, with examples of devices that use them, are supported by the fn+f2 hotkey:
LCD (computer display) External VGA (most external monitors) HDMI (televisions, camcorders, DVD players, VCRs, and video capture cards with HDMI ports) Decreasing screen brightness Press fn+f3 to decrease screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to decrease the brightness level incrementally. Increasing screen brightness Press fn+f4 to increase screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to increase the brightness level incrementally. Initiating QuickLock Press fn+f6 to initiate the QuickLock security feature. QuickLock protects your information by displaying the operating system Log On window. While the Log On window is displayed, the computer cannot be accessed until a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password is entered. NOTE: Before you can use QuickLock, you must set a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password. For instructions, refer to Help and Support. Using the keyboard 55 To use QuickLock, press fn+f6 to display the Log On window and lock the computer. Then follow the instructions on the screen to enter your Windows user password or your Windows administrator password and access the computer. Muting speaker sound Press fn+f8 to mute speaker sound. Press the hotkey again to restore speaker sound. Decreasing speaker volume Press fn+f10 to decrease speaker sound. Hold down the hotkey to decrease speaker sound incrementally. Increasing speaker volume Press fn+f11 to increase speaker sound. Hold down the hotkey to increase speaker sound incrementally. 56 Chapter 6 Pointing devices and keyboard 7 Power management Setting power options Using power-saving states The computer has two power-saving states enabled at the factory: Sleep and Hibernation. When Sleep is initiated, the power lights blink and the screen clears. Your work is saved to memory, letting you exit Sleep faster than exiting Hibernation. If the computer is in the Sleep state for an extended period or if the battery reaches a critical battery level while in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. When Hibernation is initiated, your work is saved to a hibernation file on the hard drive and the computer turns off. CAUTION: To prevent possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep or Hibernation while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. Initiating and exiting Sleep The system is set at the factory to initiate Sleep after 15 minutes of inactivity when running on battery power and 30 minutes of inactivity when running on external power. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. With the computer on, you can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:
Press fn+f1. Briefly press the power button. Close the display. Click Start, click the arrow next to the Shut down button, and then click Sleep. You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:
Briefly press the power button. If the display is closed, open the display. Setting power options 57 Press a key on the keyboard or button on the remote control (select models only). Activate the TouchPad. When the computer exits Sleep, the power light turns on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:
before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password Initiating and exiting Hibernation The system is set at the factory to initiate Hibernation after 1,080 minutes (18 hours) of inactivity when running on both battery power and external power, or when the battery reaches a critical battery level. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. To initiate Hibernation:
Click Start, click the arrow next to the Shut down button, and then click Hibernate. To exit Hibernation:
Briefly press the power button. The power light turns on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:
before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password Using the battery meter The battery meter is located in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. The battery meter allows you to quickly access power settings, view remaining battery charge, and select a different power plan. To display the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, move the pointer over the battery meter icon. To access Power Options, or to change the power plan, click the battery meter icon and select an item from the list. Different battery meter icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. The icon also displays a message if the battery has reached a low battery level, critical battery level, or reserve battery level. To hide or display the battery meter icon:
1. Right-click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left side of the notification area). 2. Click Customize notification icons. 3. Under Behaviors, select Show icons and notifications for the Power icon. 4. Click OK. 58 Chapter 7 Power management Using power plans A power plan is a collection of system settings that manages how the computer uses power. Power plans can help you conserve power or maximize performance. You can change power plan settings or create your own power plan. Viewing the current power plan
Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. Selecting a different power plan
Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then select a power plan from the list. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options, and then select a power plan from the list. Customizing power plans 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 2. Select a power plan, and then click Change plan settings. 3. Change the settings as needed. 4. To change additional settings, click Change advanced power settings and make your changes. Setting password protection on wakeup To set the computer to prompt for a password when the computer exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:
1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. In the left pane, click Require a password on wakeup. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. Click Require a password (recommended). 5. Click Save changes. Using external AC power External AC power is supplied through one of the following devices:
Using external AC power 59 WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. Approved AC adapter Optional docking device or expansion product Connect the computer to external AC power under any of the following conditions:
WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. When you are charging or calibrating a battery When you are installing or modifying system software When you are writing information to a CD or DVD When you connect the computer to external AC power, the following events occur:
The battery begins to charge. If the computer is turned on, the battery meter icon in the notification area changes appearance. When you disconnect external AC power, the following events occur:
The computer switches to battery power. The display brightness is automatically decreased to save battery life. To increase display brightness, press the fn+f4 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. Connecting the AC adapter WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-
pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. To connect the computer to external AC power:
1. 2. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector (1) on the computer. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter (2). 60 Chapter 7 Power management 3. Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet (3). Testing an AC adapter Test the AC adapter if the computer exhibits any of the following symptoms when it is connected to AC power:
The computer will not turn on. The display does not turn on. The power light is off. To test the AC adapter:
1. Remove the battery from the computer. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, and then plug it into an AC outlet. 3. Turn on the computer. If the power light turns on, the AC adapter is working properly. Contact technical support for information on obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. Select Start
> Help and Support > Get assistance. Using battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is plugged into external AC power, the computer runs on AC power. If the computer contains a charged battery and is running on external AC power supplied through the AC adapter, the computer switches to battery power if the AC adapter is disconnected from the computer. NOTE: The display brightness is decreased to save battery life when you disconnect AC power. To increase display brightness, use the fn+f4 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. You can keep a battery in the computer or in storage, depending on how you work. Keeping the battery in the computer whenever the computer is plugged into AC power charges the battery and also protects your work in case of a power outage. However, a battery in the computer slowly discharges when the computer is off and unplugged from external power. Using battery power 61 WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, display brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Finding battery information in Help and Support Help and Support provides the following tools and information about the battery:
Battery Check tool to test battery performance Information on calibration, power management, and proper care and storage to maximize battery life Information on battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity To access battery information:
Select Start > Help and Support > Learn > Power Plans: Frequently Asked Questions. Using Battery Check Help and Support provides information on the status of the battery installed in the computer. To run Battery Check:
1. Connect the AC adapter to the computer. NOTE: The computer must be connected to external power for Battery Check to function properly. 2. Select Start > Help and Support > Troubleshoot > Power, Thermal and Mechanical. 3. Click the Power tab, and then click Battery Check. Battery Check examines the battery and its cells to see if they are functioning properly, and then reports the results of the examination. Displaying the remaining battery charge
Move the pointer over the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Inserting or removing the battery CAUTION: Removing a battery that is the sole power source may cause loss of information. To prevent loss of information, save your work and initiate Hibernation or shut down the computer through Windows before removing the battery. To insert the battery:
1. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. 62 Chapter 7 Power management 2. Align the tabs on the battery with the notches on the computer (1), and then insert the battery into the battery bay. The battery release latches (2) automatically lock the battery into place. To remove the battery:
1. 2. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. Slide the battery release latches (1) to release the battery, and then remove the battery (2). Charging a battery WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. The battery charges whenever the computer is plugged into external power through an AC adapter, an optional power adapter, or an optional expansion product. Using battery power 63 The battery charges whether the computer is off or in use, but it charges faster when the computer is off. Charging may take longer if a battery is new, has been unused for 2 weeks or more, or is much warmer or cooler than room temperature. To prolong battery life and optimize the accuracy of battery charge displays, follow these recommendations:
If you are charging a new battery, charge it fully before turning on the computer. Charge the battery until the battery light turns off. NOTE:
area may show 100 percent charge before the battery is fully charged. If the computer is on while the battery is charging, the battery meter in the notification Allow the battery to discharge below 5 percent of a full charge through normal use before charging it. If the battery has been unused for one month or more, calibrate the battery instead of simply charging it. The battery light displays charge status:
On: The battery is charging. Blinking: The battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: The battery is fully charged, in use, or not installed. Maximizing battery discharge time Battery discharge time varies depending on the features you use while on battery power. Maximum discharge time gradually shortens, as the battery storage capacity naturally degrades. Tips for maximizing battery discharge time:
Lower the brightness on the display. Check the Power saver setting in Power Options. Remove the battery from the computer when it is not being used or charged. Store the battery in a cool, dry location. Managing low battery levels The information in this section describes the alerts and system responses set at the factory. Some low-
battery alerts and system responses can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. Preferences set using Power Options do not affect lights. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low battery level, the battery light blinks. If a low battery level is not resolved, the computer enters a critical battery level, and the battery light begins blinking rapidly. 64 Chapter 7 Power management The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:
If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. Using battery power 65 Resolving a low battery level CAUTION: To reduce the risk of losing information when the computer reaches a critical battery level and has initiated Hibernation, do not restore power until the power lights turn off. Resolving a low battery level when external power is available
Connect one of the following devices:
AC adapter Optional expansion product or docking device Optional power adapter Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available 1. Turn off the computer or initiate Hibernation. 2. Remove the discharged battery, and then insert a charged battery. 3. Turn on the computer. Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available
Initiate Hibernation. or Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the computer lacks sufficient power to exit Hibernation, follow these steps:
1. 2. Insert a charged battery or plug the computer into external power. Exit Hibernation by briefly pressing the power button. Calibrating a battery Calibrate a battery under the following conditions:
When battery charge displays seem inaccurate When you observe a significant change in battery run time Even if a battery is heavily used, it should not need to be calibrated more than once a month. It is also not necessary to calibrate a new battery. Step 1: Fully charge the battery WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. NOTE: The battery charges whether the computer is off or in use, but it charges faster when the computer is off. 66 Chapter 7 Power management To fully charge the battery:
1. Insert the battery into the computer. 2. Connect the computer to an AC adapter, optional power adapter, optional expansion product, or optional docking device, and then plug the adapter or device into external power. The battery light on the computer turns on. 3. Leave the computer plugged into external power until the battery is fully charged. The battery light on the computer turns off. Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Sleep 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 2. Under the current power plan, click Change plan settings. 3. Record the Turn off the display settings listed in the On battery column so that you can reset them after the calibration. 4. Change the Turn off the display settings to Never. 5. Click Change advanced power settings. 6. Click the plus sign next to Sleep, and then click the plus sign next to Hibernate after. 7. Record the On battery setting under Hibernate after so that you can reset it after the calibration. 8. Change the On battery setting to Never. 9. Click OK. 10. Click Save changes. Step 3: Discharge the battery The computer must remain on while the battery is being discharged. The battery can discharge whether or not you are using the computer, but the battery will discharge faster while you are using it. If you plan to leave the computer unattended during the discharge, save your information before beginning the discharge procedure. If you use the computer occasionally during the discharge procedure and have set energy-saving timeouts, expect the following performance from the system during the discharge process:
The monitor will not turn off automatically. Hard drive speed will not decrease automatically when the computer is idle. System-initiated Hibernation will not occur. Using battery power 67 To discharge a battery:
1. Unplug the computer from its external power source, but do not turn off the computer. 2. Run the computer on battery power until the battery is discharged. The battery light begins to blink when the battery has discharged to a low battery level. When the battery is discharged, the battery light turns off and the computer shuts down. 68 Chapter 7 Power management Step 4: Fully recharge the battery To recharge the battery:
1. 2. Plug the computer into external power and maintain external power until the battery is fully recharged. When the battery is recharged, the battery light on the computer turns off. You can use the computer while the battery is recharging, but the battery will charge faster if the computer is off. If the computer is off, turn it on when the battery is fully charged and the battery light has turned off. Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Sleep CAUTION: Failure to reenable Hibernation after calibration may result in a full battery discharge and information loss if the computer reaches a critical battery level. 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 2. Under the current power plan, click Change plan settings. 3. Reenter the settings that you recorded for the items in the On battery column. 4. Click Change advanced power settings. 5. Click the plus sign next to Sleep, and then click the plus sign next to Hibernate after. 6. Reenter the setting that you recorded for On battery. 7. Click OK. 8. Click Save changes. Conserving battery power Select the Power saver power plan through Power Options under System and Security in Windows Control Panel. Turn off wireless and local area network (LAN) connections and exit modem applications when you are not using them. Disconnect external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, when you are not using them. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Use the fn+f3 and fn+f4 hotkeys to adjust screen brightness as needed. If you leave your work, initiate Sleep or Hibernation, or shut down the computer. Storing a battery CAUTION: To prevent damage to a battery, do not expose it to high temperatures for extended periods of time. Using battery power 69 If a computer will be unused and unplugged from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. To prolong the charge of a stored battery, place it in a cool, dry place. Calibrate a battery before using it if it has been stored for one month or more. Disposing of a used battery WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. For additional information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices included with this computer. Shutting down the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information will be lost when the computer is shut down. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:
When you need to replace the battery or access components inside the computer When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB port When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period Although you can shut down the computer with the power button, the recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. To shut down the computer:
NOTE:
before shutdown is possible. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, you must first exit Sleep or Hibernation 1. Save your work and close all open programs. 2. Click Start. 3. Click Shut down. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:
Press ctrl+alt+delete, and then click the Power button. Press the power button and hold for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. 70 Chapter 7 Power management 8 Security Protecting the computer Standard security features provided by the Windows operating system and the non-Windows Setup Utility can protect your personal settings and data from a variety of risks. Follow the procedures in this chapter to use the following features:
Passwords Firewall software Antivirus support (Norton Internet Security) Critical security updates NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents, but they may not deter software attacks or prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: Before you send your computer for service, remove all password settings. Computer risk Unauthorized use of the computer Unauthorized access to data Unauthorized access to Setup Utility, BIOS settings, and other system identification information Security feature QuickLock Power-on password Firewall software Windows updates Administrator password Ongoing or future threats to the computer Critical security updates from Microsoft Unauthorized access to a Windows user account User password Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information. Several types of passwords can be set, depending on how you want to control access to your information. Passwords can be set in Windows or in the non-Windows Setup Utility preinstalled on the computer. CAUTION: To prevent being locked out of the computer, record each password you set. Because most passwords are not displayed as they are set, changed, or deleted, it is essential to record each password immediately and store it in a secure place. Protecting the computer 71 You can use the same password for a Setup Utility feature and for a Windows security feature. You can also use the same password for more than one Setup Utility feature. Use the following guidelines when setting a password in Setup Utility:
A password can be any combination of up to 8 letters and numbers and is case sensitive. A password set in Setup Utility must be entered at a Setup Utility prompt. A password set in Windows must be entered at a Windows prompt. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:
When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Write down your passwords and store them in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. Do not use your name or other personal information that could be easily discovered by an outsider. The following sections list Windows and Setup Utility passwords and describe their functions. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords, select Start > Help and Support. Setting passwords in Windows Password Administrator password User password QuickLock Setting passwords in Setup Utility Password Administrator password*
72 Chapter 8 Security Function Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility contents. Protects access to a Windows user account. It also protects access to the computer contents and must be entered when you exit Sleep or Hibernation. Protects the computer by requiring a password to be entered in the Windows Log On dialog box before you access the computer. After you set a user or administrator password, follow these steps:
1. 2. Initiate QuickLock by pressing fn+f6. Exit QuickLock by entering your Windows user or administrator password. Function Protects access to Setup Utility. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you access Setup Utility. CAUTION:
cannot access Setup Utility. If you forget your administrator password, you Password Power-on password*
Function Protects access to the computer contents. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer, or exit Hibernation. CAUTION:
cannot turn on or restart the computer, or exit Hibernation. If you forget your power-on password, you
*For details about each of these passwords, refer to the following topics. Administrator password Your administrator password protects the configuration settings and system identification information in Setup Utility. After this password is set, you must enter it each time you access Setup Utility. Your administrator password is not interchangeable with an administrator password set in Windows, nor is it displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. Be sure that you record your password and store it in a safe place. Managing an administrator password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:
1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10
= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Set Administrator Password, and then press enter. To set an administrator password, type your password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To change an administrator password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, type a new password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To delete an administrator password, type your current password in the Enter Password field, and then press enter 4 times. 3. To save your changes and exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering an administrator password At the Enter Password prompt, type your administrator password, and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the administrator password, you must restart the computer and try again. Power-on password Your power-on password prevents unauthorized use of the computer. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer, or exit Hibernation. A power-on password is not displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. Using passwords 73 Managing a power-on password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:
1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10
= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Set Power-On Password, and then press enter. To set a power-on password, type your password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To change a power-on password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, type a new password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To delete a power-on password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, and then press enter 4 times. 3. To save your changes and exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering a power-on password At the Enter Password prompt, type your password, and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the password, you must restart the computer and try again. 74 Chapter 8 Security Using antivirus software When you use the computer for e-mail or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. NOTE: HP recommends that you install antivirus software to help protect your computer. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Norton Internet Security, an antivirus program, is preinstalled on the computer. Your version of Norton Internet Security includes 60 days of free updates. It is strongly recommended that you protect the computer against new viruses beyond 60 days by purchasing extended update service. Instructions for using and updating Norton Internet Security software and for purchasing extended update service are provided within the program. To access Norton Internet Security, or to get more information about it, click Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security. NOTE: HP recommends that you always update the antivirus software to help protect your computer. NOTE: For more information about computer viruses, type viruses in the Search box in Help and Support. Using antivirus software 75 Using firewall software When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, unauthorized persons may be able to gain access to the computer, your personal files, and information about you. Use the firewall software preinstalled on the computer to protect your privacy. Firewall features include logging and reporting of network activity, and automatic monitoring of all incoming and outgoing traffic. Refer to the firewall user guide or contact your firewall manufacturer for more information. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to Internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized e-mail attachments. To temporarily resolve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. 76 Chapter 8 Security Installing critical updates CAUTION: Microsoft sends alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. Updates to the operating system and other software may have become available after the computer was shipped. To be sure that all available updates are installed on the computer, observe these guidelines:
Run Windows Update as soon as possible after you set up your computer. Use the update link at Start > All Programs > Windows Update. Run Windows Update at regular intervals, such as once a month. Obtain updates to Windows and other Microsoft programs, as they are released, from the Microsoft Web site and through the updates link in Help and Support. Installing critical updates 77 78 Chapter 8 Security 9 Software updates Updated versions of the software provided with your computer may be available on the HP Web site. Most software and BIOS updates on the HP Web site are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. To update the software, follow these steps, which are explained in the remainder of this guide:
1. Identify your computer model, product category, and series or family. Prepare for a system BIOS update by identifying the BIOS version currently installed on the computer. If your computer is connected to a network, consult the network administrator before installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. NOTE: The computer system BIOS is stored on the system ROM. The BIOS initializes the operating system, determines how the computer will interact with the hardware devices, and provides for data transfer among hardware devices, including the time and date. 2. 3. Access the updates on the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com. Install the updates. 79 Updating the BIOS To update the BIOS, first determine what BIOS version you currently have and then download and install the new BIOS. Determining the BIOS version To determine whether available BIOS updates contain later BIOS versions than those currently installed on the computer, you need to know the version of the system BIOS currently installed. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be displayed by opening Setup Utility. To display the BIOS information:
1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10
= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. 3. If Setup Utility does not open with the system information displayed, use the arrow keys to select the Main menu. When the Main menu is selected, BIOS and other system information is displayed. To exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To prevent damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:
Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep or Hibernation. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. To download a BIOS update:
1. 2. 3. Access the page on the HP Web site that provides software for your computer:
Select Start > Help and Support > Maintain, and then select the software and drivers update. Follow the instructions on the screen to identify your computer and access the BIOS update you want to download. At the download area, follow these steps:
a. b. Identify the BIOS update that is later than the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the instructions on the screen to download your selection to the hard drive. 80 Chapter 9 Software updates Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is to be downloaded. you must access this path when you are ready to install the update. NOTE:
installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed, follow these steps:
1. Open Windows Explorer by selecting Start > Computer. 2. Double-click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the instructions on the screen. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Updating the BIOS 81 Updating programs and drivers To download and install software other than a BIOS update, follow these steps:
1. 2. 3. Access the page on the HP Web site that provides software for your computer:
Select Start > Help and Support, and then select the software and drivers update. Follow the instructions on the screen to find the software you want to update. At the download area, select the software you want to download and follow the instructions on the screen. NOTE: Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the software is to be downloaded. you must access this path when you are ready to install the software. 4. When the download is complete, open Windows Explorer by selecting Start > Computer. 5. Double-click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 6. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 7. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The installation begins. 8. Complete the installation by following the instructions on the screen. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. 82 Chapter 9 Software updates 10 Setup Utility Starting Setup Utility Setup Utility is a ROM-based information and customization utility that can be used even when your Windows operating system is not working. The utility reports information about the computer and provides settings for startup, security, and other preferences. To start Setup Utility:
Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10
= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. Using Setup Utility Changing the language of Setup Utility The following procedure explains how to change the language of Setup Utility. If Setup Utility is not already running, begin at step 1. If Setup Utility is already running, begin at step 2. 1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10
= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select System Configuration > Language, and then press enter. 3. Use the arrow keys to select a language, and then press enter. 4. When a confirmation prompt with your language selected is displayed, press enter. 5. To save your change and exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. Your change goes into effect immediately. Navigating and selecting in Setup Utility Because Setup Utility is not Windows based, it does not support the TouchPad. Navigation and selection are by keystroke. To choose a menu or a menu item, use the arrow keys. To choose an item in a list or to toggle a field, for example an Enable/Disable field, use either the arrow keys or f5 or f6. Starting Setup Utility 83 To select an item, press enter. To close a text box or return to the menu display, press esc. To display additional navigation and selection information while Setup Utility is open, press f1. Displaying system information The following procedure explains how to display system information in Setup Utility. If Setup Utility is not open, begin at step 1. If Setup Utility is open, begin at step 2. 1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10
= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. 3. Select the Main menu. System information such as the system time and date, and identification information about the computer is displayed. To exit Setup Utility without changing any settings, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. Restoring default settings in Setup Utility The following procedure explains how to restore Setup Utility default settings. If Setup Utility is not already running, begin at step 1. If Setup Utility is already running, begin at step 2. 1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10
= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Exit > Load Setup Defaults, and then press enter. 3. When the Setup Confirmation is displayed, press enter. 4. To save your change and exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. The Setup Utility default settings go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Your password, security, and language settings are not changed when you restore the factory default settings. Exiting Setup Utility You can exit Setup Utility with or without saving changes. To exit Setup Utility and save your changes from the current session:
If the Setup Utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display. Then use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. To exit Setup Utility without saving your changes from the current session:
If the Setup Utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display. Then use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. After either choice, the computer restarts in Windows. 84 Chapter 10 Setup Utility Setup Utility menus The menu tables in this section provide an overview of Setup Utility options. NOTE: Some of the Setup Utility menu items listed in this chapter may not be supported by your computer. Main menu Select System information Security menu Select Administrator password Power-On Password System Configuration menu To do this View and change the system time and date. View identification information about the computer. View specification information about the processor, memory size, and system BIOS. To do this Enter, change, or delete an administrator password. Enter, change, or delete a power-on password. Select Language Support Processor C4 State Boot Options To do this Change the Setup Utility language. Enable/disable the processor C4 sleep state. Set the following boot options:
f10 and f12 Delay (sec.)Set the delay for the f10 and f12 functions of Setup Utility in intervals of 5 seconds each (0, 5, 10, 15, 20). Internal Network Adapter bootEnable/disable boot from Internal Network Adapter. Boot OrderSet the boot order for:
Internal hard drive (select models only) USB Floppy USB CD/DVD ROM Drive USB Diskette on Key USB Hard drive USB Card Reader Network adapter Setup Utility menus 85 Select To do this NOTE: Only the devices attached to the system appear in the boot order menu. Diagnostics menu Select To do this Hard Disk Self Test (select models only) Run a comprehensive self-test on the hard drive. Memory Test Run a diagnostic test on the system memory. 86 Chapter 10 Setup Utility Index A AC adapter administrator password connecting 60 identifying 10 testing 61 creating 73 entering 73 managing 73 airport security devices 40 antennas 9 applications key, Windows 4 audio devices, connecting external 33 audio functions, checking 33 audio-in (microphone) jack 5, 30 audio-out (headphone) jack 5, 30 B battery calibrating 66 charging 63, 66 conserving power 69 discharging 64 disposing 70 identifying 10 inserting 62 low battery levels 64 recharging 69 removing 62 storing 69 battery bay, identifying 8 Battery Check 62 battery light 5, 63, 64 battery power 61 battery release latches 8, 62 battery temperature 69 bay, battery 8 BD drive 43 BIOS, updating 80 Blu-ray Disc ROM with SuperMulti DVDR/RW Double Layer 44 Bluetooth device 13 boot options 85 boot order 85 buttons left TouchPad 1 power 3 right TouchPad 1 wireless 3 C cables LAN 27 USB 45 VGA 35 caps lock light, identifying 2 CD drive 43 changing Setup Utility language 83 charging batteries 63, 66 checking audio functions 33 components additional hardware 10 bottom 8 display 7 front 4 left-side 6 right-side 5 TouchPad 1 connecting to a WLAN 18 connection, external power 60 conservation, power 69 cord, power 10 corporate WLAN connection 18 critical battery level 65 D Diagnostics menu 86 digital card inserting 46 removing 47 stopping 47 supported formats 46 Digital Media Slot, identifying 5 Disk Cleanup software 41 Disk Defragmenter software 41 diskette drive 43 display image, switching 55 screen brightness hotkeys 55 display switch, identifying 7 displaying system information 84 drive light, identifying 5 drive media 57 drives connecting external 44 diskette 43 external 43 hard 41, 42, 43 optical 43 drives, boot order 85 DVD drive 43 E earbuds 5, 30 encryption 18 entering a power-on password 74 entering an administrator password 73 esc key 4 exiting Setup Utility 84 external audio devices, connecting 33 external drive 43 external monitor port 35 external monitor port, identifying 6 Index 87 F firewall 18 fn key 4, 53 function keys 4, 53 H hard disk drive external 43 installing 42 removing 41 replacing 41 hard drive external 43 installing 42 removing 41 replacing 41 hard drive bay, identifying 8 hard drive cover removing 50 replacing 51 hard drive self test 86 hardware, identifying 1 HDMI port 35 HDMI port, identifying 6 HDMI, connecting 35 headphone (audio-out) jack 5, 30 headphones 5, 30 Hibernation exiting 58 initiated during critical battery level 65 initiating 58 high-definition devices, connecting 35 hotkeys decreasing screen brightness 55 decreasing speaker sound 56 decreasing speaker volume 31 description 53 increasing screen brightness 55 increasing speaker volume 31, 56 initiating QuickLock 55 initiating Sleep 54 muting speaker sound 56 muting speaker volume 31 88 Index switching screen image 55 using 54 HP Connection Manager software 15 HP Mobile Broadband Module 20 HP USB Ethernet Adapter, connecting 27 hubs 45 I icons network 13, 25 wireless 13 installed drives, identifying 40 interference, minimizing 26 internal display switch, identifying 7 internal microphone, identifying 7, 30 Internet connection setup 17 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 5, 30 audio-out (headphone) 5, 30 RJ-45 (network) 6 K keyboard hotkeys, identifying 53 keys esc 4 fn 4 function 4 Windows applications 4 Windows logo 4 L labels Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 11 regulatory 11 service tag 10 language support 85 latches, battery release 8 left TouchPad button, identifying 1 lights battery 5 caps lock 2 drive 5 power 2 webcam 7 wireless 2 local area network (LAN) cable required 27 connecting cable 27 low battery level 64 M Main menu 85 maintenance Disk Cleanup 41 Disk Defragmenter 41 managing a power-on password 74 managing an administrator password 73 memory module inserting 50 removing 50 memory module slot 8 memory test 86 microphone (audio-in) jack 5, 30 minimizing interference 26 monitor port, external 6 monitor, connecting 35 mouse, external connecting 53 setting preferences 53 multimedia components, identifying 29 multimedia software installing 32 using 32 mute hotkey, identifying 30 N navigating in Setup Utility 83 network cable connecting 27 noise suppression circuitry 27 network cable, connecting 27 network icon 13, 25 network jack, identifying 6 network key 25 network security codes network key 25 SSID 25 noise suppression circuitry, network cable 27 O operating system 70 optical drive sharing 44 P passwords administrator 73 power-on 73 set in Setup Utility 72 set in Windows 72 external monitor 6, 35 HDMI 6, 35 USB 5, 6, 45 ports power connecting 60 conserving 69 power button, identifying 3 power connector, identifying 6 power cord, identifying 10 power light, identifying 2 power-on password creating 74 entering 74 managing 74 Processor C4 State 85 product name and number, computer 10 programs, updating 82 projector, connecting 35 public WLAN connection 18 HP Mobile Broadband Module Q QuickLock 72 QuickLock hotkey 55 R readable media 57 regulatory information serial number 11 regulatory label 11 wireless 11 release latches battery 8, 63 restoring default settings 84 right TouchPad button, identifying 1 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 6 S screen brightness hotkeys 55 screen image, switching 55 security cable slot, identifying 6 Security menu 85 security, wireless 17 selecting in Setup Utility 83 serial number, computer 10 service tag 10 setup of WLAN 17 Setup Utility, passwords set in 72 setup, computer 1 shared drives 44 shutdown 70 shutting down 70 SIM inserting 20 removing 21 Sleep exiting 57 initiating 57 Sleep hotkey 54 slots security cable 6 software Disk Cleanup 41 Disk Defragmenter 41 HP Connection Manager 15 installing 32 multimedia 32 Windows Media Player 32 Wireless Assistant 15 solid-state drive (SSD) 40 speakers, identifying 4, 30 storing battery 69 System Configuration menu 85 system information 85 T temperature 69 TouchPad buttons 1 identifying 1 using 53 TouchPad scroll zone, identifying 2 traveling with the computer 69 turning off the computer 70 U unresponsive system 70 USB cable, connecting 45 USB devices connecting 45 description 45 removing 45 stopping 45 USB hubs 45 USB ports, identifying 5, 6, 45 V vents, identifying 6, 8 video transmission types 55 volume down hotkey, identifying 31 volume up hotkey, identifying 31 volume, adjusting 31 W webcam light, identifying 7, 30 webcam, identifying 7, 30 Windows applications key, identifying 4 Windows logo key, identifying 4 Windows, passwords set in 72 wireless antennas 9 Wireless Assistant software 14, 15 wireless button, identifying 3 wireless controls button 14 HP Connection Manager 14 operating system 14 Wireless Assistant software 14 wireless function key 14 wireless icon 13 wireless light 14 wireless light, identifying 2 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 18 corporate WLAN connection 18 equipment needed 17 functional range 19 public WLAN connection 18 security 17 WLAN 8 WLAN antennas, identifying 9 Index 89 WLAN device 13 writable media 57 WWAN antennas, identifying 9 WWAN device 20 90 Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Users Manual | Users Manual | 1.24 MiB | June 04 2009 |
Contents:
Broadcom 802.11g WLAN and Bluetooth PCI-E Mini Card, BCM94312HMGB User Manual Introduction Completing the Setup Utility Functions Specifications Regulatory Information Company Copyright Statement Company Trademark Statement. Microsoft and Windows are trademarks owned by Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. WLCARD-UG200-D2 01.30.03 file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/index.htm [1/30/03 10:11:15 PM]
Introduction:
Back to Contents Introduction: Broadcom 802.11g PCI-E Mini Card User Manual Broadcom 802.11g WLAN Solution Using the Broadcom 802.11g WLAN Features and Requirements Broadcom 802.11g WLAN Solution The Broadcom 802.11g WLAN solution accesses wireless local area networks (LANs), enables the sharing of a local printer and files with others in the network, accesses the Internet, and enables roaming about the officewire-free. This wireless LAN solution is designed for both the home user and small businessesand it is scalable so that users can be added and new network features can be enabled as networking needs grow. WEP is a security protocol for wireless local area networks (defined in IEEE Std 802.11, 1999 Edition) that encrypts data sent over radio waves. The use of the WEP key is optional and can be enabled or disabled. If the network being connecting to has enabled WEP, WEP must also be enabled in the network profile and the WEP key must be set to match the WEP key used by the network. Otherwise, it is impossible to connect to the network. The Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook makes a wireless connection to a network, as illustrated on the following figure. Networks 1 and 2 are infrastructure type of networks. The two notebook computers connected by radio waves form an ad hoc type of network. Enterprise Users file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/intro.htm (1 of 3) [1/30/03 10:11:16 PM]
Introduction:
Obtain the following information from the network administrator:
l Network names (SSID) of the specific wireless networks to connect to l WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) key information (if any) for the networks to connect to l For Microsoft Windows networking, the customer name and workgroup name l For a network account, a user name and password l An IP address (if not using a DHCP server) Home Users The access point (AP) that communicates with the Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook has a preassigned network name
(SSID) that the notebook recognizes upon startup. To enable WEP, use any string of numbers for the WEP key. Upon startup, the Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook detects certain wireless networks (WLANs) that are within range. Before connecting to these and other wireless networks, configure a profile for each network.See Completing the setup. Using the Broadcom 802.11g WLAN The Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook is an IEEE 802.11g based wireless LAN device. A LAN is composed of two or more computers that are connected to each other to share files or common equipment such as a printer or an Internet connection. A wireless LAN provides the same functionality of a wired network, but it eliminates the need to install networking cables and other networking equipment. Not only is a wireless LAN easier to deploy, but it also allows for roaming. For example, when using the WLAN enabled notebook, it is possible to roam from a conference room to an office without being disconnected from the network. Features and Requirements An IEEE 802.11 based wireless LAN includes the following features:
l Support for IEEE 802.11g draft specification l Support for IEEE 802.11b standard l 2.4-GHz band operation l Network data rate of up to 54 Mbit/s l Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption The following items are needed for participating in a wireless LAN:
l Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook computer running on a Microsoft Windows XP operating system l Software compact disc containing the drivers, software reference guide, and Help file The Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook works with any Wi-Fi CERTIFIED base station or wireless client adapter. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/intro.htm (2 of 3) [1/30/03 10:11:16 PM]
Introduction:
Back to top Back to Contents Ccopyright and Trademark Information. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/intro.htm (3 of 3) [1/30/03 10:11:16 PM]
Completing the Setup:
Back to Contents Completing the Setup: Broadcom 802.11g WLAN User Manual NOTEBefore starting, obtain the required network information from the network administrator or the wireless access point installer (see The Broadcom 802.11g WLAN Solution in Introduction). Modes of Operation Configuring a Network Profile Modes of Operation A wireless LAN can be configured for two different modes of operation: infrastructure network and computer-to-computer
(ad hoc) network. Whereas each mode has its advantages, one mode may be more appropriate than the other, depending on the location and type of network connection. Infrastructure Mode The key difference between the infrastructure type of network and an ad hoc network is that the infrastructure network includes a base station (host) computer that has a built-in wireless network adapter and is connected to a wireless access point (AP). This functionality allows computers on the infrastructure wireless LAN to access the resources and tools of the wired LAN, including Internet access, e-mail, file transfers, and printer sharing. Characteristics Networked computers communicate with each other through a dedicated AP. All data transmitted between the computers on this wireless LAN passes through the AP. Advantages l Extended range. The access point extends the range of the wireless LAN. Each computer can communicate with other computers equipped by wireless networks that are within the range of the access point. l Roaming. As the user moves around the home or office, the 802.11g enabled notebook determines the best access point to use to ensure continuous communication with the network. l Network connectivity. An access point can provide wireless LAN access to an existing wired network by bridging the two networks together. This gives users of the wireless LAN access to all the functions of a wired networkfrom file server access to e-mail and the Internet. Disadvantages Because the infrastructure mode offers more features, it requires additional components and setup time to deploy. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (1 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup:
Requirements A base station computer having a wired connection to the Internet, a wireless network adapter, and a connection to an AP. Computer-to-Computer Mode A peer-to-peer (ad hoc) network is the easiest to deploy and is ideal for home use or in small offices. This mode allows the sharing of files with other employees, printing to a shared office printer, and access to the Internet through a shared modem. With ad hoc networking, however, the computer is only able to communicate with other wireless networks that are within a certain range and are in the same wireless workgroup. Characteristics Networked computers send data directly to each other. Advantages l Simple setup l Cost efficiency Disadvantages Communication is limited to those who are located within a certain range. Configuring a Network Profile To connect to a wireless network, a network profile for that network must be configured on the 802.11g enabled notebook. If the 802.11g enabled notebook computer came with the 802.11g WLAN card already installed and set up at the factory, follow the network profile configuration instructions provided below. NOTEFor more information on how to configure a network profile and IEEE 802.1x authentication, click Learn about setting up wireless network configuration at the bottom of the Wireless Networks tab of Wireless Network Connection Properties. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection you want to configure by doing the following. 1. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (2 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup:
4. Click the Wireless Networks tab. You can configure a network profile for networks that are listed under Available networks as well as those that are not listed. When you have completed configuring a network profile, the network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. The computer automatically connects to the network at the top of the list. Follow the applicable instruction set below, based on whether or not the network is listed and whether or not the network requires a WEP key (check with your network administrator to see if a WEP key is required). NOTEBoth the network name and the network key are case-sensitive. l Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key l Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires a WEP key l Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Does Not Require a WEP Key l Configuring a Profile for a Network That is Not Listed and Requires a WEP Key Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (3 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup:
doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. 2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Under Available networks, click the network name, and then click Configure. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (4 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup:
4. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (5 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup:
5. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (6 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup:
2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Under Available networks, click the network name, and then click Configure. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (7 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup:
4. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 5. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 6. Type the network key in the Network key box and again in the Confirm network key box. NOTEIt is not necessary to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as the network key is typed. 7. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (8 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup:
8. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Does Not Require a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (9 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup:
2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (10 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. 5. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (11 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup:l 6. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that network. If the Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Requires a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (12 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup:
2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (13 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup:
4. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box and again in the Confirm network key box. 5. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 6. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 7. Type the network key in the Network key box and again in the Confirm network key box. NOTEIt is not necessary to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as the network key is typed. 8. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (14 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup:
9. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that Back to top Back to Contents Copyright and Trademark Information. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (15 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Utility Functions:
Back to Contents Utility Functions: 802.11g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Running Utility Functions Adding a New Network to the List of Preferred Networks Viewing or Modifying the Wireless Network Properties Setting Up an Ad Hoc (Peer-to-Peer) Group Network for Connecting to the Internet Adding an Ad Hoc Network Disabling the Radio Running Utility Functions The utility functions and details for the wireless network connection are available in Control Panel. These functions include Disabling the network device, Renaming the connection, View status of this connection, and Change settings of this connection. Changing Settings 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Click Wireless Network Connections, and then click Change settings of this connection. l Click the Wireless Network tab to configure available networks, add and remove networks, and change network properties. l Click the General tab, then click Configure m To change the properties of the network adapter, click the Advanced tab. m To view details about the driver files, update the driver for the device, roll back to the previous driver, or to uninstall the driver, click the Driver tab. m To view resource settings, click the Resources tab. m To change power management settings, click the Power Management tab. The Advanced tab in Network Adapter Properties lists the properties for the Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) adapter. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (1 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]
Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual l IBSS Channel Number selects the independent basic service set (IBSS) channel number on which to operate. The Company 54g enabled notebook comes preset for use on channels 111. This setting is acceptable in most countries. Some countries allow use on more channels. If you travel to a country that allows the use of other channels, change the IBSS Channel Number to that number. l Locale selects the adapter properties that comply with the operating regulations for that locale. The Locale settings include USA, Israel, Japan, Jordan, Thailand, and Worldwide. This wireless LAN device is normally preset by default for the country in which the device is sold. Before operating this WLAN device, verify that the locale selection is correct by following the steps described in Changing Settings above. On the Advanced tab of HP WLAN 54g W450 Network Adapter Properties, m Click Locale m In the Value list, select the appropriate regional location If you travel to other countries with the Company 54g enabled notebook, follow the same steps to change the locale setting to match the destination country. Reset the locale setting back to the appropriate home setting after returning. If the destination country is not listed, change the Locale setting to Worldwide. l Radio Enable/Disable allows you to turn the radio on or off as necessary to comply with restrictions prohibiting the emission of radio signals, such as during takeoff and landing onboard a commercial aircraft. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (2 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]
Utility Functions: 802.11g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual l Rate sets the transmission rate. The default setting is Use best rate. This automatically adjusts the data rate to the optimal rate based on the capabilities of the other clients and access points. The default values for the properties listed below are set for maximum performance. Therefore, It is not recommended for home users to change the settings for any of these properties. Only network administrators or persons having technical wireless LAN experience should attempt to change any of the settings. frames. available:
adapter. l Fragmentation Threshold is the threshold at which the IEEE 802.11 adapter break the packet into multiple l IBSS 54g (TM) Mode is used to set the connection type in an ad hoc network. The following options are m 54g - 802.11b compatible links at the best rate with an IEEE 802.11b and an IEEE 802.11g network m 54g - Performance links only with IEEE 802.11g networks at the highest rate. In addition it excludes m 802.11b Mode links only with IEEE 802.11b networks at the highest rate. In addition it excludes IEEE
(recommended setting). IEEE 802.11b networks. 802.11g networks. l Locally Administered MAC Address is used to override the MAC address of the Company 54g Wireless LAN l PLCP Header is used to set the header type used for CCK rates. Can be long, auto (short/long). l Power Output is used for putting out a percentage of the maximum output power. l Power Save Mode is used to put the Company 54g enabled notebook into the IEEE 802.11 Power Save mode. In Power Save mode, the radio is periodically powered down to conserve power. When in Power Save mode, packets are stored in the AP until the STA comes on. Adding a New Network to the List of Preferred Networks If the 802.11g enabled notebook is running at a location in which a wireless LAN is operating, and it is within range of the access point, the computer automatically connects to the network at the top of the list under Preferred networks. A network profile must be configured for each network to add to the list To add a new network to the list of preferred networks, first check to see if the new network is listed on the Wireless Networks tab under Available networks. If it is, follow the applicable instructions below according to which operating system your computer is running and whether or not the network requires a WEP key. NOTESee the network administrator or the wireless access point installer to obtain a WEP key, as necessary. l See Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key in Completing the Setup l See Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires a WEP Key in Completing the Setup. If the network being added to the Preferred networks list is not listed in the Available networks list, follow the applicable instructions below according to which operating system the computer is running and whether or not the network requires a WEP key. l See Configuring a Profile for a Network That is Not Listed and Does Not Require a WEP Key in Completing the Setup l See Configuring a Profile for a Network That is Not Listed and Requires a WEP Key in Completing the Setup. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (3 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]
Utility Functions:
Viewing or Modifying the Wireless Network Properties 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Click Wireless Network Connection, then click Change settings of this connection. 3. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 4. Verify that the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings box is selected. If it is not, select it. 5. Under Preferred networks click the network name and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (4 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]
Utility Functions:
It is possible to enable or disable WEP data encryption and change the network name and the network key (see Completing the setup for instructions). Setting Up an Ad Hoc (Peer-to-Peer) Group Network for Connecting to the Internet To connect the computers in an ad hoc group network to the Internet, the Windows Internet connection sharing (ICS) component must be installed. ICS installation is not required, however, for communication among a group of computers that have a Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) installed in each computer. An ad hoc network must be added under Preferred networks. See Running Utility Functions. Select a desktop computer to serve as the host computer; all other computers are called clients. The host computer must be running the Windows XP operating system. The host computer is the only computer that connects directly to the Internet. Company recommends using the desktop computer having the fastest microprocessor and the most memory as the host computer. NOTEInternet connection sharing requires that the host computer have either a modem or another network adapter in addition to a wireless network adapter. The modem or the additional network adapter is used to access the Internet. The file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (5 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]
Utility Functions:
802.11g enabled notebook is used to share the Internet connections with other clients. Setting Up Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) on the Host Computer 1. Connect the host computer to the Internet. 2. From the host computer Start menu, select Help and Support. 3. Perform a search on Internet Connection Sharing. 4. From the Pick a task list, select Enable Internet Connection Sharing on a Network Connection. 5. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete setting up ICS
. Adding an Ad Hoc Network An ad hoc network (for peer-to-peer communicating) can either require a WEP key or not. Instructions for adding and configuring an ad hoc network for both types of ad hoc networks are provided below:
l Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key l Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Requires a WEP Key Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Click Wireless Network Connection, then click Change settings of this connection. 3. Click the Wireless Networks tab. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (6 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]
Utility Functions:
4. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (7 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]
Utility Functions:
5. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. 6. Select the This is a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network; wireless access points are not used box. 7. Clear the Data encryption (WEP enabled) and the The Key is provided for me automatically boxes if they are selected. 8. Click OK. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (8 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]
Utility Functions:
9. Click Advanced. 10. Select Computer-to-computer (ad hoc) networks only, and click Close. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (9 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]
Utility Functions:
11. Click OK. The added ad hoc network appears at the top of the list under Preferred networks. 12. To verify that the computer is connected to the added ad hoc network, reopen the Network Properties window and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the added network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon for the ad hoc network. Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Requires a WEP Key 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Click Wireless Network Connection, then click Change settings of this connection. 3. Click the Wireless Networks tab. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (10 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]
Utility Functions:
4. Verify that the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings box is selected. If it is not, select it. 5. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (11 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]
Utility Functions:
6. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 7. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box and again in the Confirm network key box. 8. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 9. Type the network key in the Network key box. NOTEIt is not necessary to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as the network key is typed. 10. Select the This is a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network; wireless access points are not used box. 11. Click OK. 12. Click Advanced file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (12 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]
Utility Functions:
13. Select Computer-to-computer (ad hoc) networks only, and click Close. 14. Click OK. The added ad hoc network appears at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (13 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]
Utility Functions:
15. To verify that the computer is connected to the added ad hoc network, reopen the Network Properties window and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the added network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon for that network. Disabling the Radio l To disable the radio on the Company 54g enabled notebook, right-click the wireless network connection icon in the system tray and click Disable. Back to top Back to Contents Copyright and Trademark Information file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (14 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]
Using the Broadcom BT Utility: Quick Start Guide Step 1: Installing the Software NOTE: This installation is required before you insert the module into the USB port of your computer. 1. Insert the Bluetooth USB Module installation compact disc (CD) into the CD-ROM or DVD drive of your computer. 2. If the Main Menu screen appears automatically, select Install software and click OK. If the Main Menu screen does not appear automatically, click Start, click Run, type x:\setup.exe (where x is the CD-ROM or DVD drive letter of your computer), and click OK. 3. Click Next, click Finish, and then restart your computer. 4. Right-click the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar notification area (system tray) and click Start Using Bluetooth. Follow the instructions provided by the Initial Bluetooth Configuration Wizard. Step 2: Inserting the Module Make sure that the Bluetooth USB Module is properly inserted inside your computer. If you started at Step 1: Installing the Software The Found New Hardware Wizard detects and installs the device. When the installation is finished, you are ready to begin using the Bluetooth features of this computer. If you skipped Step 1: Installing the Software, you are ready to begin using the Bluetooth features of this computer. NOTE: Before you begin, however, please review the Bluetooth USB Module Users Guide. This document provides important information and instructions that will help you do the things you want to do with your Bluetooth enabled computer. Glossary Authentication A Bluetooth security feature that is used to verify identity; it requires a Bluetooth PIN Code from the remote device. Authorization A Yes-or-No Bluetooth security feature that requires operator intervention to avoid having the connection time out and fail. Bluetooth device Bluetooth enabled hardware such as a computer, printer, fax, mouse, keyboard, cell phone, headset, or PDA. Bluetooth PIN Code The alphanumeric string (up to 16 characters) that is typed to respond to a Bluetooth PIN Code Request. Also referred to as a Passkey. Bluetooth A short-range (9.14 meters/30 feet) networking protocol that allows enabled devices to automatically recognize each other. Bluetooth wireless technology allows quick and easy connectivity of Bluetooth enabled devices. Client Applications Software applications on this computer that allow this computer to use the Bluetooth services provided by remote Bluetooth devices. Link Key An internally generated unique security key (based on a Passkey, the Bluetooth Device Address, and an internally generated random number) that is exchanged by paired devices as proof of identity before a connection is established. Local Services Services that this computer provides to other Bluetooth devices. Paired Devices Bluetooth devices must be paired before they can connect. Paired devices share a unique Link Key, which they exchange each time they connect. Secure Connection A setting that requires a Passkey or Link Key each time you attempt to make a connection. All data exchanged over the Bluetooth connection is encrypted. Depending on other configuration options, authorization may also be required. Regulatory Statements for BCM94312HMGB USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.
-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canada Industry Canada (IC) This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This device has been designed to operate with the antennas listed below, and having a maximum gain of 3.9 dBi @ 2.4GHz and 5.8dBi@5GHz. Antennas not included in this list or having a gain greater than 3.9 dBi @ 2.4GHz and 5.8dBi@5GHz are strictly prohibited for use with this device. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. EuropeEU Declaration of Conformity and Restrictions Hereby, Broadcom Corp, declares that this equipment complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. 0984 symbol and can be used throughout the This equipment is marked with the European community. This indicates compliance with the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC and meets the relevant parts of following technical specifications:
EN 300 328 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Wideband Transmission Systems; Data transmission equipment operating in the 2,4GHz ISM band and using spread spectrum modulation techniques; Harmonized EN covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE directive. EN 301 893 - Broadband Radio Access Networks (BRAN); 5 GHz high performance RLAN;
Harmonized EN covering essential requirements of article 3.2 of the R&TTE Directive EN 301 489-17 - Electromagnetic Compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 17 Specific Conditions for Wideband Data and HIPERLAN Equipment. EN 60950 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment. EN 62311 Assessment of electronic and electrical equipment related to human exposure restrictions for electromagnetic fields (0Hz - 300 GHz). Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. France - 2.4GHz for Metropolitan France :
In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:
Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Taiwan DGT warning statement Appendix:
(ID):
CCXXxxLPyyyZz
,, CCXXxxLPyyyZz .
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Host label format | ID Label/Location Info | 10.23 KiB |
PROPOSED FCC, IC LABEL FOR HOST DEVICES CONTAINS Broadcom model: BCM943212HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044 IC: 4324A-BRCM1044 CCXXxxLPyyyZz Label Location: on the bottom of the notebook PC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Label | ID Label/Location Info | 27.97 KiB | June 04 2009 |
BCM94312HMGB Proposed ID Label Regulatory Model Number: BCM94312HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044 IC: 4324A-BRCM1044 CCXXxxLPyyyZz BCM-BCM94312HMGB 0984 Label Location: on the bottom of the EUT PROPOSED FCC ID LABEL FOR HOST DEVICE THIS DEVICE CONTAINS Broadcom BCM943212HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044 IC: 4324A-BRCM1044 CCXXxxLPyyyZz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Label ID | ID Label/Location Info | 286.58 KiB |
Contains Broadcom Corporation Radio Model BCM94312HMGB 574912-001 2.4DS/OF4 2.4FH1 CCAB09LP1280T2 CMIIT ID: 2009YYXXXX SCT: XXXXXXXXXXXXX CNC: XXXXXXX N 1 2 0 7 5 Contains FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044 XXXXXXXXXX D A 1 0 2 8 8 9 I t D A S a n d a r d s C o m p l i e s w i t h A P P R O V E D T A
X X X X X X C o n t a n s I i C
4 3 2 4 A B R C M 1 0 4 4 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SCALE 1:1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Agent authorization 1 of 2 | Cover Letter(s) | 115.51 KiB |
Date: March 20, 2007 Compliance Certification Services Certification Division 561F Monterey Road Morgan Hill, CA 95037 To whom it may concern:
We, the undersigned, hereby authorize the Testing Division of Compliance Engineering Services, Inc., d.b.a. Compliance Certification Services and hereafter referred to as CCS, to act on our behalf solely with regards to the Certification (as defined below);
provided, however, CCS will not provide for any payments beyond published Corporate Contract between CCS and Broadcom without our prior written consent. Certification means only the following actions: Test and issue reports for our products upon request; sign FCC, IC and CAB application forms relating to our products on our behalf; pay certification fees on our behalf; submit FCC, IC and ETSI test reports and product documents for product approval; and answer questions from certification review on our behalf. We, the undersigned, hereby certify that we are not subject to a denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 853(a). In authorizing CCS Testing Division as our agent, we still recognize that we are responsible to:
a)
(individual Regulatory Authority requirements pertaining to Equipment Authorization);
b) provision for examining documentation and access to all areas, records (including internal audit reports) and personnel for the purposes of evaluation (e.g. testing, inspection, assessment, surveillance, reassessment) and resolution of complaints;
c) certification has been granted;
d) Division into disrepute and not make any statement regarding our product certification which the Certification Division may consider misleading or unauthorized;
e) matter that contains any reference thereto and return any certification documents as required by the Certification Division;
upon suspension or cancellation of certification, discontinue use of all advertising do not use our product certification in such a manner as to bring the Certification make all necessary arrangements for the conduct of the evaluation, including make claims regarding certification only in respect of the scope for which comply with the the relevant provisions of the certification program use certification only to indicate the products are certified as being in conformity endeavor to ensure that no certificate or report nor any part thereof is used in a f) with specified standards;
g) misleading manner;
h) ensure that any reference to our product certification in communication media such as documents, brochures or advertising, complies with the requirements of the Certification Division, which are governed by individual Regulatory Authority requirements;
i) keep a record of all complaints made known to us relating to the products compliance with requirements of the relevant standard and to make these records available to the Certification Division when requested;
j) found in products or services that affect compliance with the requirements for certification;
k) This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Sincerely Yours, take appropriate action with respect to such complaints and any deficiencies document the actions taken. Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Agent authorization 2 of 2 | Cover Letter(s) | 95.92 KiB |
Date: January 11, 2008 Compliance Certification Services Certification Division 47173 Benicia Street Fremont, CA 94538, USA To whom it may concern:
This is an amendment to the existing authorization dated on March 20, 2007.
|, the undersigned, hereby authorize Ms. Claire Hoque/Application Examiner of Compliance Engineering Services, Inc., d.b.a. Compliance Certification Services and hereafter referred to as CCS, to act on our behalf in all manners relating to application for FCC equipment authorization, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Sincerely yours, iL Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Request for C2PC Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 38.32 KiB |
Date: April 13, 2011 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class li Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044
(Original Grant date: 4/6/2009) Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044. There is no hardware or electrical modification made to the applying modular transmitter itself. The major changes filed under this application:
Change #1 Establishing Netbook/laptop/Notebook host platform approval per KDB 447498 section 2) a) ii) A device may be approved for use in multiple host platforms, each with similar Samily attributes, for example, PDA, laptop and tablet computers, when each host platform is tested in the most conservative exposure conditions and the I-g SAR is < 0.8 W/kg for all configurations. A representative host is selected for SAR evaluation. The closest antenna-to-user distance is 1.8cm. The highest measured SAR is 0. 368W/kg. Installation and operating requirements, including restrictions for the most conservative antenna-
to-user separation distance and host platform(s), approved in the equipment authorization are documented in the OEM integrators instruction including the information to the end users on how to comply with RF exposure requirements. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely LJ Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Request for confidentiality | Cover Letter(s) | 38.95 KiB |
Date: April 13, 2011 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Coiumbia MD 21046 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: QDS-BRCM 1044 To Whom It May Concern:
Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions rules (47 CFR 0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachments as confidential document from public disclosure indefinitely Antenna specifications Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. In additional to above mentioned documents, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commissions policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFR 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the following attachments until 10/13/2011. Setup Photos OEM Installation Guide It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Regards, an Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086 i i i
i i i
i
i
i i i i
i i i
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | C2PC Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 31.92 KiB |
Date: Nov 5, 2009 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 c.c.:
Compliance Certification Services
(Original Grant date: 04/06/2009) Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044 Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044. There is no hardware or electrical modification made to the applying modular transmitter itself. This permissive change filing is made establishing Netbook/laptop/Notebook host platform approval per KDB 447498 section 2) a) ii) A device may be approved for use in multiple host platforms, each with similar family attributes, for example, PDA, laptop and tablet computers, when each host platform is tested in the most conservative exposure conditions and the 1-g SAR is < 0.8 W/kg for all configurations. A representative host is selected for SAR evaluation. The most conservative antenna-to-user distance is 160mm. The highest measured SAR is0.000869W/kg. Installation and operating requirements, including restrictions for the most conservative antenna-
to-user separation distance and host platform(s), approved in the equipment authorization are documented in the OEM integrators instruction including the information to the end users on how to comply with RF exposure requirements. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Confidentiality Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 71.05 KiB |
QDS-BRCM1044 Request for Confidentiality Date: November 5, 2009 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject:
FCC ID:
To Whom It May Concern:
Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions rules (47 CFR 0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachments as confidential document from public disclosure indefinitely Antenna Specifications Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. In additional to above mentioned documents, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commissions policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFR 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the following attachments until 05/09/2010. Setup Photos OEM Installation Guide It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Regards, Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Agent authorization | Cover Letter(s) | 95.93 KiB |
Date: January 11, 2008 Compliance Certification Services Certification Division 47173 Benicia Street Fremont, CA 94538, USA To whom it may concern:
This is an amendment to the existing authorization dated on March 20, 2007.
|, the undersigned, hereby authorize Ms. Claire Hoque/Application Examiner of Compliance Engineering Services, Inc., d.b.a. Compliance Certification Services and hereafter referred to as CCS, to act on our behalf in all manners relating to application for FCC equipment authorization, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Sincerely yours, A Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Antenna specification | Parts List/Tune Up Info | 545.65 KiB |
Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information
(English Language Required for Intel Regulatory Review / Approval) Platform Platform Owner Brand Name Model Name ODM Target Launch Date Antenna Brand Name Part Number Module With WLAN Module
(Check Box) Broadcom Hewlett-Packard International Pte. Ltd. Hewlett-Packard International Pte. Ltd. Vasco Quanta
( 2009 / / ) Wistron Neweb Corp. Main Antenna: 81.EKA15.G01(DQ6A15G0100) Aux Antenna: 81.EKA15.G01(DQ6A15G0100) WM3B2200BG WM3B2915ABG WM3945ABG 4965AGN 4965AG_ 533ANX Family 512ANX Family 533AN Family 512AN Family Atheros AR9285 Broadcom BCM94312HMG Broadcom BCM94322HMS Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 1/1 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Antenna Sample / Antenna Data Requirements for worldwide regulatory approval n o i t c e S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description of Required OEM / ODM Antenna Information 1A Part Number for Antenna only 1B Antenna Manufacturer Name 1C Description of Antenna Type US / IC EU Japan Taiwan S.Korea Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required N/A N/A N/A N/A Part number of Antenna Assembly / cable impedance, length & diameter. 1D 1E Tx1, Tx2 & Tx3 antenna (Peak Gain W/ cable loss) *
1F Tx1, Tx2 & Tx3 antenna (Peak Gain only) *
1G VSWR of cable including connector 1H Tx1, Tx2 & Tx3 antenna (Cable loss W/ connector) *
1E OR 1F, 1G, 1H Required Desired Desired Desired Desired Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Dimensioned Photographs and Drawings of Tx1, Tx2, and Tx3 (or Rx3) antennas Radiation patterns of antennas loaded in the host platform. Platform model name / number - correlated to antenna manufacturer and antenna part number Photograph(s) or Drawings showing location of antennas in platform. (S. Korea requires photographs of antennas for approval submission). Taiwan requires pictures of each antenna type shown in the system. Mech. drawings / photos with dimensions of antenna locations and distance from end-user (For evaluation of SAR testing requirement). Photograph(s) or Drawings showing the location of all antennas (WLAN, other) and distance between those transmitting antennas. Information will be used to evaluate whether co-location testing is required. Required Required Required Required Required Required Desired Required N/A Required Required Required Desired Required Desired Required Required Desired Required
(Photos) Required
(Photos) Required N/A N/A N/A N/A Required N/A N/A N/A N/A Local representative contact information for LMA/
PARS process. Required N/A N/A N/A N/A NOTE:
(*) if 3rd antenna is Rx only (e.g. receive only for 4965AGN) then peak gain and cable loss not required Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 2/2 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Antenna Information Section 1. Antenna Assembly Specifications Antenna Assembly Summary:
NOTE:
(*) If Rx3 only (3rd antenna receives only, e.g. for 4965AGN) then the information marked with * is not required Antenna Peak Gain Table:
Antenna Peak Gain required being test in system basis.
1E frame contend absolutely peak antenna gain include H/V
If Rx3 only (3rd antenna receives only, e.g. for 4965AGN) then the information is not required for Rx3. Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 3/3 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Section 2. Dimensioned Photos or Drawings of Antennas Include a dimensioned photo and dimensioned drawing of Main and AUX antenna here. Main Antenna Dimensioned Drawing:
Main Antenna Photo:
Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 4/4 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Auxiliary Antenna Dimensioned Drawing:
Auxiliary Antenna Photo:
Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 5/5 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Include front view photo of all 4 antennas here. Antenna Manufacturer: Wistron Neweb Corporation Antenna Part Number: 81.EKA15.G01 (Tx1), 81.EKA15.G01 (Tx2 or Rx2) Include back view photo of all 4 antennas here. Antenna Manufacturer: Wistron Neweb Corporation Antenna Part Number: 81.EKA15.G01 (Tx1), 81.EKA15.G01 (Tx2 or Rx2) Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 6/6 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Section 3. Radiation characteristics of antennae Loaded in Host Platform 2400-2500MHz radiation characteristic Main antenna: 2400 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 7/7 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Main antenna: 2450 MHz Main antenna @2.45 GHz 00 5 0
-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
-30
-35 180 E Total V-pol. H-pol. 270 90 Peak Gain H-pol
-1.13 V pol
-2.13 Main antenna: 2500 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 8/8 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Auxiliary antenna: 2400 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 9/9 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 10/10 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Auxiliary antenna: 2450 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 11/11 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Auxiliary antenna: 2500 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 12/12 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 5150-5350 MHz radiation characteristic Main antenna: 5150 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 13/13 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Main antenna: 5250 MHz Main antenna @5.25 GHz 00 5 0
-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
-30
-35 180 E Total H-pol. V-pol. 270 90 Peak Gain H-pol
-2.88 V pol
-4.32 Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 14/14 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Main antenna: 5350 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 15/15 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Auxiliary antenna: 5150 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 16/16 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Auxiliary antenna: 5250 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 17/17 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Auxiliary antenna: 5350 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 18/18 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 5470-5725MHz radiation characteristic Main antenna: 5470 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 19/19 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Main antenna: 5600 MHz Main antenna @5.6 GHz E Total V-pol. H-pol. 270 EBC-C16 90 00 5 0
-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
-30
-35 180 Peak Gain H-pol
-0.96 V pol
-3.33 Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 20/20 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Main antenna: 5725 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 21/21 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Auxiliary antenna: 5470 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 22/22 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Auxiliary antenna: 5600 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 23/23 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Auxiliary antenna: 5725 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 24/24 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 5785-5850MHz radiation characteristic Main antenna: 5785 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 25/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Main antenna: 5850 MHz Main antenna @5.85 GHz 00 5 0
-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
-30
-35 180 E Total V-pol. H-pol. 270 90 Peak Gain H-pol 0.26 V pol
-4.92 Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 26/26 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Auxiliary antenna: 5785 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 27/27 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Auxiliary antenna: 5850 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 28/28 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Section 4. Host Platform Information OEM / ODM Host platform: (XXXXXXX) platform correlated to antenna data Rating Label Photo:
Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 29/29 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Section 5. Antenna Host Platform Location Information Include a dimensioned photo or dimensioned drawing of Tx1, Tx2 and Tx3 antenna placements. (Not applicable for receive-only antenna e.g. Rx3 for 4965AGN) 290 mm 160 mm 62 mm WLAN MAIN WWAN MAIN WLAN AUX WWAN AUX 204 mm 180 mm Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 30/30 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Section 6. Antenna dimensional information for SAR evaluation Include a dimensioned photo or dimensioned drawing showing the distance (mm) between the transmit antennas and the user (excluding hands, wrist, feet, lap/ thigh, and ankle) WLAN AUX WWAN AUX WLAN MAIN WWAN MAIN 245 mm 220 mm 230 mm 250 mm 180 mm 165 mm 63 mm Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 31/31 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Section 7. Diagram Example of Co-Location Antenna Separation Include a dimensioned photo or dimensioned drawing showing the distance (mm) between all WLAN transmit antennas and other co-located radiator transmit antenna such as Bluetooth, WWAN,..
(Note: Due to the evolving rules regarding co-location, each platform will need to be reviewed on a case by case basis) WWANAux Antenna WLANAuxAntenna 290 161 108 7 84 62 6 320 330 350 WLANMain Antenna WWANMain Antenna 180mm 204 mm 300 WWAN Module WLAN Module BT Antenna 55 42 203mm Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 32/32 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.8 Section 8. Local representative contact information Local representative contact information is required for regulatory support for target countries below. Local company name Contact name FAX Number e-Mail Address Notes Phone number Argentina Brazil Indonesia Israel Malaysia Mexico Singapore South Africa USA, Canada Telecommunication Equipment Dealer License Required Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 33/33
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Authorization letter | Cover Letter(s) | 115.51 KiB |
Date: March 20, 2007 Compliance Certification Services Certification Division 561F Monterey Road Morgan Hill, CA 95037 To whom it may concern:
We, the undersigned, hereby authorize the Testing Division of Compliance Engineering Services, Inc., d.b.a. Compliance Certification Services and hereafter referred to as CCS, to act on our behalf solely with regards to the Certification (as defined below);
provided, however, CCS will not provide for any payments beyond published Corporate Contract between CCS and Broadcom without our prior written consent. Certification means only the following actions: Test and issue reports for our products upon request; sign FCC, IC and CAB application forms relating to our products on our behalf; pay certification fees on our behalf; submit FCC, IC and ETSI test reports and product documents for product approval; and answer questions from certification review on our behalf. We, the undersigned, hereby certify that we are not subject to a denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 853(a). In authorizing CCS Testing Division as our agent, we still recognize that we are responsible to:
a)
(individual Regulatory Authority requirements pertaining to Equipment Authorization);
b) provision for examining documentation and access to all areas, records (including internal audit reports) and personnel for the purposes of evaluation (e.g. testing, inspection, assessment, surveillance, reassessment) and resolution of complaints;
c) certification has been granted;
d) Division into disrepute and not make any statement regarding our product certification which the Certification Division may consider misleading or unauthorized;
e) matter that contains any reference thereto and return any certification documents as required by the Certification Division;
upon suspension or cancellation of certification, discontinue use of all advertising do not use our product certification in such a manner as to bring the Certification make all necessary arrangements for the conduct of the evaluation, including make claims regarding certification only in respect of the scope for which comply with the the relevant provisions of the certification program use certification only to indicate the products are certified as being in conformity endeavor to ensure that no certificate or report nor any part thereof is used in a f) with specified standards;
g) misleading manner;
h) ensure that any reference to our product certification in communication media such as documents, brochures or advertising, complies with the requirements of the Certification Division, which are governed by individual Regulatory Authority requirements;
i) keep a record of all complaints made known to us relating to the products compliance with requirements of the relevant standard and to make these records available to the Certification Division when requested;
j) found in products or services that affect compliance with the requirements for certification;
k) This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Sincerely Yours, take appropriate action with respect to such complaints and any deficiencies document the actions taken. Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Class II permissive change letter | Cover Letter(s) | 20.69 KiB |
(Original Grant date: 04/06/2009) Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Date: September 14, 2009 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044 Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044, originally granted on 04/06/2009. The major changes filed under this application:
Change #1 The antennas used on this platform are the same type as in the original FCC modular approval and with lower gain. EMC hereby remains compliance and no testing is required. SAR testing is conducted to demonstrate compliance to the FCC RF exposure requirement. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Adding portable platform, HP HSTNN-Q45C. Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | TCB Q and A | Cover Letter(s) | 83.40 KiB |
Lucy Tsai From:
Sent:
To:
Subject:
Attachments:
Chi Tsou Wednesday, September 09, 2009 4:49 PM Lucy Tsai RE: Broadcom Corporation, FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044, Assessment NO.: AN09T9559/9560, Notice#1 Regulatory Statement for WLAN in portable PCs.doc; BCM94312HMGB host label doc.doc;
09U12760-1A FCC IC SAR Test Report.pdf Hi Lucy, Please see my response in line:
Original Message Hi Chi, Please address following issues. Q#1: Host user manual does not include related regulatory statements. Please provide.
<answer> the client put together attached file, as a general guidance for portable PCs with WLAN radios. Let me know if we can use this. Q#2: Please provide host label format.
<answer> attached. Q#3: According to the user manual, except WLAN and Bluetooth, HP laptop PC also equipped with WWAN module inside but there is no information addressed in this C2PC filing. Will they transmit simultaneously? Please be noted that the technical review of this application will only focus on Broadcom WLAN/BT module; as for other transmitters, it will be grantee's responsibility to ensure that FCC rule regulations are complied, including RF exposure co location issues.
<answer> 'Bluetooth antenna is located more than 20cm away from the WLAN antennas. Collocation with WWAN antenna is address in the WWAN FCC certification filings.'
Thanks, Chi Best Regards, Lucy The items indicated above must be submitted before processing can continue on the above referenced application. Failure to provide the requested information within 30 days of the original email date may result in application dismissal and forfeiture of the filing fee. Also, please note that partial responses increase processing time and should not be submitted Any questions about the content of this correspondence should be directed to the email address listed below the name of the sender. 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Antenna Information | Cover Letter(s) | 11.00 KiB |
BCM94312HMGB FCC, IC portable update June 2009 Max Peak gain
(2.4GHz) Max Peak gain (5GHz) Comments for internal reference Antenna Antenna type No 1 2 Manufacturer Wistron Neweb Corp. Amphenol Model number 81.EKA15.G01 81.EKA15.G01 TX1 IV1634-11-003 TX2 IV1634-11-004 Main 81.EDG15.G74 Aux 81.EDG15.G75 CAN 4313 901 012501B CAN 4313 901 022501B PIFA PIFA PIFA PIFA 3 WNC 4 Yageo Aux -0.94dBi(V) Main -0.20dBi(H) HP Prescott TX2 0.25dBi (H) TX1 -0.04dBi (V) HP Bixby Main 0.13dBi (H) Aux 0.75dBI (V) HP Bixby TX1 1.92dBi (V) TX2 0.97dBi (H) HP Gucci
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Confidentiality Request | Cover Letter(s) | 36.29 KiB |
Date: June 9, 2009 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: QDS-BRCM 1044 To Whom It May Concern:
Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions rules (47 CF R 0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachments as confidential document from public disclosure indefinitely None Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. In additional to above mentioned documents, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commissions policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFR 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the following attachments unti! 12/09/2009. Setup Photos Antenna Specifications User Manuals It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Regarfs, Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Request for PC2 | Cover Letter(s) | 24.15 KiB |
Date: July 14, 2009 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1044
(Original Grant date: 04/06/2009) Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class Il permissive change for FCC iD: QDS-BRCM1044, originally granted on 04/06/2009. The major changes filed under this application:
Change #1 Adding portable platform, HP HSTNN-Q44C. Change #2 Adding portable platform, HP HSTNN-!70C. The antennas used in these platforms are of the same type as approved in the original filing and have lower gains. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Modular Approval Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 94.48 KiB | June 04 2009 |
Applicant/Grantee FCC ID:
Broadcom Corporation QDS-BRCM1044 Request for Modular Approval Request for Limited Modular Approval Requirements EUT Conditions Comply (Y/N) Section 15.212 Modular Transmitters Single Modular Approval Requirements Refer to external photos. Shield is over the radio circuit module. Y All inputs to the modules are buffered through logic or microprocessor inputs. Refer to Schematics. Internal 3.3V power regulator. Refer to schematics. Module contains a hirose connector. The module will go inside final product where the antenna(s) will be integral to the end product, which can be considered permanently attached. Y Y Y Module was tested outside. Refer to test setup photos in test report. Y 1 2 3 4 5 The radio elements of the modular transmitter must have their own shielding. The physical crystal and tuning capacitors may be located external to the shielded radio elements. The modular transmitter must have buffered modulation/data inputs (if such inputs are provided) to ensure that the module will comply with Part 15 requirements under conditions of excessive data rates or over-modulation. The modular transmitter must have its own power supply regulation. The modular transmitter must comply with the antenna and transmission system requirements of Sections 15.203, 15.204(b) and 15.204(c). The antenna must either be permanently attached or employ a unique antenna coupler (at all connections between the module and the antenna, including the cable). The professional installation provision of Section 15.203 is not applicable to modules but can apply to limited modular approvals under paragraph (b) of this section. The modular transmitter must be tested in a stand-alone configuration, i.e., the module must not be inside another device during testing for compliance with Part 15 requirements. Unless the transmitter module will be battery powered, it must comply with the AC line conducted requirements found in Section 15.207. AC or DC power lines and data input/output lines connected to the module must not contain ferrites, unless they will be marketed with the module (see Section 15.27(a)). The length of these lines shall be the length typical of actual use or, if that length is unknown, at least 10 centimeters to insure that there is no coupling between the case of the module and supporting 6 Refer to label provided. Y equipment. Any accessories, peripherals, or support equipment connected to the module during testing shall be unmodified and commercially available
(see Section 15.31(i)). The modular transmitter must be equipped with either a permanently affixed label or must be capable of electronically displaying its FCC identification number.
(A) If using a permanently affixed label, the modular transmitter must be labeled with its own FCC identification number, and, if the FCC identification number is not visible when the module is installed inside another device, then the outside of the device into which the module is installed must also display a label referring to the enclosed module. This exterior label can use wording such as the following: Contains Transmitter Module FCC ID: XYZMODEL1 or Contains FCC ID:
XYZMODEL1. Any similar wording that expresses the same meaning may be used. The Grantee may either provide such a label, an example of which must be included in the application for equipment authorization, or, must provide adequate instructions along with the module which explain this requirement. In the latter case, a copy of these instructions must be included in the application for equipment authorization.
(B) If the modular transmitter uses an electronic display of the FCC identification number, the information must be readily accessible and visible on the modular transmitter or on the device in which it is installed. If the module is installed inside another device, then the outside of the device into which the module is installed must display a label referring to the enclosed module. This exterior label can use wording such as the following:
Contains FCC certified transmitter module(s). Any similar wording that expresses the same meaning may be used. The user manual must include instructions on how to access the electronic display. A copy of these instructions must be included in the application for equipment authorization. The modular transmitter must comply with any specific rules or operating requirements that ordinarily apply to a complete transmitter and the manufacturer must provide adequate instructions along with the module to explain any such requirements. A copy of these instructions must be included in the application for equipment authorization. 7 Refer to manual Y 8 The modular transmitter must comply with any applicable RF exposure requirements in its final configuration. Refer to MPE calculation in the Test report Y A limited modular approval may be granted for single or split modular transmitters that do not comply with all of the above requirements, e.g., shielding, minimum signaling amplitude, buffered modulation/data inputs, or power supply regulation, if the manufacturer can demonstrate by alternative means in the application for equipment authorization that the modular transmitter meets all the applicable Part 15 requirements under the operating conditions in which the transmitter will be used. Limited modular approval also may be granted in those instances where compliance with RF exposure rules is demonstrated only for particular product configurations. The applicant for certification must state how control of the end product into which the module will be installed will be maintained such that full compliance of the end product is always ensured.
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2011-04-21 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 2009-11-17 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |
3 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
4 | 2009-09-15 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
5 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||
6 | 2009-07-20 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
7 | 2009-04-06 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | Original Equipment | |
8 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
9 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Effective |
2011-04-21
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
2009-11-17
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
2009-09-15
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
2009-07-20
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
2009-04-06
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Broadcom Corporation
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0007091952
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Physical Address |
270 Innovation Drive
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
San Jose, 95134
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
San Jose, California 95134
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | TCB Application Email Address |
c******@ccsemc.com
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
m******@ccsemc.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
g******@ict.cetecom.de
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
|||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Grantee Code |
QDS
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Equipment Product Code |
BRCM1044
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Name |
A******** L********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Title |
Manager, Compliance Engineering
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Telephone Number |
40892********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Fax Number |
408-5********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
a******@broadcom.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Firm Name |
COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATION SERVICES
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Name |
T****** C****
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Physical Address |
47173 Benicia Street
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
Fremont, California 94538
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
Fremont, 94538
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
Fremont, California
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Telephone Number |
(510)********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
T******@CCSEMC.COM
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Firm Name |
COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATION SERVICES
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Name |
T******** C******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Physical Address |
47173 Benicia Street
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
Fremont, California 94538
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
Fremont, 94538
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Telephone Number |
(510)********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
T******@CCSEMC.COM
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 10/13/2011 | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | 05/09/2010 | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | 09/25/2009 | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | 12/09/2009 | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | 09/30/2009 | |||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | 802.11g Wireless LAN + BluetoothPCI-E Mini Card | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | 802.11g Wireless LAN + Bluetooth PCI-E Mini Card | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | 802.11g Wireless LAN + BluetoothPCI-E Mini | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Modular Equipment Type | Single Modular Approval | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Grant Comments | Class II permissive change to add the portable configuration with antenna-body separation distance at 1.8cm to simulate the antenna position in the Netbook/Laptop/Notebook host platform as documented in this filing. The highest measured SAR in the Netbook/laptop/Notebook host platform with the most conservative antenna-to-user distance of 1.8cm is 0.386 W/kg. Modular Approval. Power output listed is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons when this module is used as mobile device per section 2.1091. This module can be used with Netbook/notebook/laptop computers with substantially similar physical dimensions, construction, and electrical and RF characteristics. Compliance of this device in all final host configurations is the responsibility of the Grantee. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. End users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The overall highest measured SAR for the Netbook/Laptop/Notebook/Tablet host platform is 1.38 W/kg under this FCC ID. | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Class II Permissive Change filing in establishing netbook/notebook/laptop platform approval. This device has been evaluated with most conservative antenna-to-body separation distance of 16 cm to simulate the antenna positioned in the display section of Netbook/notebook/laptop computer. Modular Approval. Power output listed is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons when this module is used as mobile device per section 2.1091. This module can be used with Netbook/notebook/laptop computers with substantially similar physical dimensions, construction, and electrical and RF characteristics. Compliance of this device in all final host configurations is the responsibility of the Grantee. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures.. End users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Class II Permissive Change filing in establishing netbook/notebook/laptop platform approval. This device has been evaluated with most conservative antenna-to-body separation distance of 16 cm to simulate the antenna positioned in the display section of Netbook/notebook/laptop computer. Modular Approval. Power output listed is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons when this module is used as mobile device per section 2.1091. This module can be used with Netbook/notebook/laptop computers with substantially similar physical dimensions, construction, and electrical and RF characteristics. Compliance of this device in all final host configurations is the responsibility of the Grantee. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. End users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Highest measured SAR value @ 16 cm antenna-to-user distance is 0.038 W/kg. W/kg for Netbook/notebook/laptop platform. Highest measured SAR value for notebook computer is 0.295 W/kg. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Class II Permissive Change to allow portable configurations in specific hosts as documented in this filing. Modular approval. Output power listed is conducted. This module may only be installed by the OEM or an OEM integrator. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance requirements. This transmitter is approved for use in configurations specified in the application filing. Operating and installation requirements must be provided. Additional equipment authorization is required for changes that result in the need for SAR evaluation. Highest measured body SAR values as documented in this filing is 0.038 W/kg. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Class II Permissive Change to allow portable configurations in specific hosts as documented in this filing. Modular approval. Output power listed is conducted. This module may only be installed by the OEM or an OEM integrator. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance requirements. This transmitter is approved for use in configurations specified in the application filing. Operating and installation requirements must be provided. Additional equipment authorization is required for changes that result in the need for SAR evaluation. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Class II Permissive Change to allow portable configurations. Power output listed is conducted. Output power listed is conducted. This module may only be installed by the OEM or an OEM integrator. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance requirements. For operation in portable RF exposure conditions, SAR compliance was evaluated in specific notebook computer(s) with specific configuration for lap held and other positions as shown in filings under this FCC ID. The highest reported Body-SAR value for this device is 0.295 W/kg. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Modular Approval. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Modular approval. Output power listed is conducted. This module may only be installed by the OEM or an OEM integrator. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance requirements. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Modular approval. Output power listed is conducted. This module may only be installed by the OEM or an OEM integrator. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance requirements. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Firm Name |
Compliance Certification Services
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
CETECOM Inc.
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Name |
T**** C****
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
B**** J****
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
K**** L****
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Telephone Number |
510-7********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
510-7********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
408-5********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | Fax Number |
510-6********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
408-5********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
t******@ccsemc.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
b******@ccsemc.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 |
k******@cetecom.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3890000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0050000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3890000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3890000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0050000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3890000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 1 | 15B | CC | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3890000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0050000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC